1 /* 2 ** 2001 September 15 3 ** 4 ** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of 5 ** a legal notice, here is a blessing: 6 ** 7 ** May you do good and not evil. 8 ** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others. 9 ** May you share freely, never taking more than you give. 10 ** 11 ************************************************************************* 12 ** The code in this file implements the function that runs the 13 ** bytecode of a prepared statement. 14 ** 15 ** Various scripts scan this source file in order to generate HTML 16 ** documentation, headers files, or other derived files. The formatting 17 ** of the code in this file is, therefore, important. See other comments 18 ** in this file for details. If in doubt, do not deviate from existing 19 ** commenting and indentation practices when changing or adding code. 20 */ 21 #include "sqliteInt.h" 22 #include "vdbeInt.h" 23 24 /* 25 ** Invoke this macro on memory cells just prior to changing the 26 ** value of the cell. This macro verifies that shallow copies are 27 ** not misused. A shallow copy of a string or blob just copies a 28 ** pointer to the string or blob, not the content. If the original 29 ** is changed while the copy is still in use, the string or blob might 30 ** be changed out from under the copy. This macro verifies that nothing 31 ** like that ever happens. 32 */ 33 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 34 # define memAboutToChange(P,M) sqlite3VdbeMemAboutToChange(P,M) 35 #else 36 # define memAboutToChange(P,M) 37 #endif 38 39 /* 40 ** The following global variable is incremented every time a cursor 41 ** moves, either by the OP_SeekXX, OP_Next, or OP_Prev opcodes. The test 42 ** procedures use this information to make sure that indices are 43 ** working correctly. This variable has no function other than to 44 ** help verify the correct operation of the library. 45 */ 46 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST 47 int sqlite3_search_count = 0; 48 #endif 49 50 /* 51 ** When this global variable is positive, it gets decremented once before 52 ** each instruction in the VDBE. When it reaches zero, the u1.isInterrupted 53 ** field of the sqlite3 structure is set in order to simulate an interrupt. 54 ** 55 ** This facility is used for testing purposes only. It does not function 56 ** in an ordinary build. 57 */ 58 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST 59 int sqlite3_interrupt_count = 0; 60 #endif 61 62 /* 63 ** The next global variable is incremented each type the OP_Sort opcode 64 ** is executed. The test procedures use this information to make sure that 65 ** sorting is occurring or not occurring at appropriate times. This variable 66 ** has no function other than to help verify the correct operation of the 67 ** library. 68 */ 69 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST 70 int sqlite3_sort_count = 0; 71 #endif 72 73 /* 74 ** The next global variable records the size of the largest MEM_Blob 75 ** or MEM_Str that has been used by a VDBE opcode. The test procedures 76 ** use this information to make sure that the zero-blob functionality 77 ** is working correctly. This variable has no function other than to 78 ** help verify the correct operation of the library. 79 */ 80 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST 81 int sqlite3_max_blobsize = 0; 82 static void updateMaxBlobsize(Mem *p){ 83 if( (p->flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Blob))!=0 && p->n>sqlite3_max_blobsize ){ 84 sqlite3_max_blobsize = p->n; 85 } 86 } 87 #endif 88 89 /* 90 ** This macro evaluates to true if either the update hook or the preupdate 91 ** hook are enabled for database connect DB. 92 */ 93 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK 94 # define HAS_UPDATE_HOOK(DB) ((DB)->xPreUpdateCallback||(DB)->xUpdateCallback) 95 #else 96 # define HAS_UPDATE_HOOK(DB) ((DB)->xUpdateCallback) 97 #endif 98 99 /* 100 ** The next global variable is incremented each time the OP_Found opcode 101 ** is executed. This is used to test whether or not the foreign key 102 ** operation implemented using OP_FkIsZero is working. This variable 103 ** has no function other than to help verify the correct operation of the 104 ** library. 105 */ 106 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST 107 int sqlite3_found_count = 0; 108 #endif 109 110 /* 111 ** Test a register to see if it exceeds the current maximum blob size. 112 ** If it does, record the new maximum blob size. 113 */ 114 #if defined(SQLITE_TEST) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_BUILTIN_TEST) 115 # define UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(P) updateMaxBlobsize(P) 116 #else 117 # define UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(P) 118 #endif 119 120 /* 121 ** Invoke the VDBE coverage callback, if that callback is defined. This 122 ** feature is used for test suite validation only and does not appear an 123 ** production builds. 124 ** 125 ** M is an integer, 2 or 3, that indices how many different ways the 126 ** branch can go. It is usually 2. "I" is the direction the branch 127 ** goes. 0 means falls through. 1 means branch is taken. 2 means the 128 ** second alternative branch is taken. 129 ** 130 ** iSrcLine is the source code line (from the __LINE__ macro) that 131 ** generated the VDBE instruction. This instrumentation assumes that all 132 ** source code is in a single file (the amalgamation). Special values 1 133 ** and 2 for the iSrcLine parameter mean that this particular branch is 134 ** always taken or never taken, respectively. 135 */ 136 #if !defined(SQLITE_VDBE_COVERAGE) 137 # define VdbeBranchTaken(I,M) 138 #else 139 # define VdbeBranchTaken(I,M) vdbeTakeBranch(pOp->iSrcLine,I,M) 140 static void vdbeTakeBranch(int iSrcLine, u8 I, u8 M){ 141 if( iSrcLine<=2 && ALWAYS(iSrcLine>0) ){ 142 M = iSrcLine; 143 /* Assert the truth of VdbeCoverageAlwaysTaken() and 144 ** VdbeCoverageNeverTaken() */ 145 assert( (M & I)==I ); 146 }else{ 147 if( sqlite3GlobalConfig.xVdbeBranch==0 ) return; /*NO_TEST*/ 148 sqlite3GlobalConfig.xVdbeBranch(sqlite3GlobalConfig.pVdbeBranchArg, 149 iSrcLine,I,M); 150 } 151 } 152 #endif 153 154 /* 155 ** Convert the given register into a string if it isn't one 156 ** already. Return non-zero if a malloc() fails. 157 */ 158 #define Stringify(P, enc) \ 159 if(((P)->flags&(MEM_Str|MEM_Blob))==0 && sqlite3VdbeMemStringify(P,enc,0)) \ 160 { goto no_mem; } 161 162 /* 163 ** An ephemeral string value (signified by the MEM_Ephem flag) contains 164 ** a pointer to a dynamically allocated string where some other entity 165 ** is responsible for deallocating that string. Because the register 166 ** does not control the string, it might be deleted without the register 167 ** knowing it. 168 ** 169 ** This routine converts an ephemeral string into a dynamically allocated 170 ** string that the register itself controls. In other words, it 171 ** converts an MEM_Ephem string into a string with P.z==P.zMalloc. 172 */ 173 #define Deephemeralize(P) \ 174 if( ((P)->flags&MEM_Ephem)!=0 \ 175 && sqlite3VdbeMemMakeWriteable(P) ){ goto no_mem;} 176 177 /* Return true if the cursor was opened using the OP_OpenSorter opcode. */ 178 #define isSorter(x) ((x)->eCurType==CURTYPE_SORTER) 179 180 /* 181 ** Allocate VdbeCursor number iCur. Return a pointer to it. Return NULL 182 ** if we run out of memory. 183 */ 184 static VdbeCursor *allocateCursor( 185 Vdbe *p, /* The virtual machine */ 186 int iCur, /* Index of the new VdbeCursor */ 187 int nField, /* Number of fields in the table or index */ 188 int iDb, /* Database the cursor belongs to, or -1 */ 189 u8 eCurType /* Type of the new cursor */ 190 ){ 191 /* Find the memory cell that will be used to store the blob of memory 192 ** required for this VdbeCursor structure. It is convenient to use a 193 ** vdbe memory cell to manage the memory allocation required for a 194 ** VdbeCursor structure for the following reasons: 195 ** 196 ** * Sometimes cursor numbers are used for a couple of different 197 ** purposes in a vdbe program. The different uses might require 198 ** different sized allocations. Memory cells provide growable 199 ** allocations. 200 ** 201 ** * When using ENABLE_MEMORY_MANAGEMENT, memory cell buffers can 202 ** be freed lazily via the sqlite3_release_memory() API. This 203 ** minimizes the number of malloc calls made by the system. 204 ** 205 ** The memory cell for cursor 0 is aMem[0]. The rest are allocated from 206 ** the top of the register space. Cursor 1 is at Mem[p->nMem-1]. 207 ** Cursor 2 is at Mem[p->nMem-2]. And so forth. 208 */ 209 Mem *pMem = iCur>0 ? &p->aMem[p->nMem-iCur] : p->aMem; 210 211 int nByte; 212 VdbeCursor *pCx = 0; 213 nByte = 214 ROUND8(sizeof(VdbeCursor)) + 2*sizeof(u32)*nField + 215 (eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE?sqlite3BtreeCursorSize():0); 216 217 assert( iCur>=0 && iCur<p->nCursor ); 218 if( p->apCsr[iCur] ){ /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-FALSE*/ 219 sqlite3VdbeFreeCursor(p, p->apCsr[iCur]); 220 p->apCsr[iCur] = 0; 221 } 222 if( SQLITE_OK==sqlite3VdbeMemClearAndResize(pMem, nByte) ){ 223 p->apCsr[iCur] = pCx = (VdbeCursor*)pMem->z; 224 memset(pCx, 0, sizeof(VdbeCursor)); 225 pCx->eCurType = eCurType; 226 pCx->iDb = iDb; 227 pCx->nField = nField; 228 pCx->aOffset = &pCx->aType[nField]; 229 if( eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ){ 230 pCx->uc.pCursor = (BtCursor*) 231 &pMem->z[ROUND8(sizeof(VdbeCursor))+2*sizeof(u32)*nField]; 232 sqlite3BtreeCursorZero(pCx->uc.pCursor); 233 } 234 } 235 return pCx; 236 } 237 238 /* 239 ** Try to convert a value into a numeric representation if we can 240 ** do so without loss of information. In other words, if the string 241 ** looks like a number, convert it into a number. If it does not 242 ** look like a number, leave it alone. 243 ** 244 ** If the bTryForInt flag is true, then extra effort is made to give 245 ** an integer representation. Strings that look like floating point 246 ** values but which have no fractional component (example: '48.00') 247 ** will have a MEM_Int representation when bTryForInt is true. 248 ** 249 ** If bTryForInt is false, then if the input string contains a decimal 250 ** point or exponential notation, the result is only MEM_Real, even 251 ** if there is an exact integer representation of the quantity. 252 */ 253 static void applyNumericAffinity(Mem *pRec, int bTryForInt){ 254 double rValue; 255 i64 iValue; 256 u8 enc = pRec->enc; 257 assert( (pRec->flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Int|MEM_Real))==MEM_Str ); 258 if( sqlite3AtoF(pRec->z, &rValue, pRec->n, enc)==0 ) return; 259 if( 0==sqlite3Atoi64(pRec->z, &iValue, pRec->n, enc) ){ 260 pRec->u.i = iValue; 261 pRec->flags |= MEM_Int; 262 }else{ 263 pRec->u.r = rValue; 264 pRec->flags |= MEM_Real; 265 if( bTryForInt ) sqlite3VdbeIntegerAffinity(pRec); 266 } 267 } 268 269 /* 270 ** Processing is determine by the affinity parameter: 271 ** 272 ** SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER: 273 ** SQLITE_AFF_REAL: 274 ** SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC: 275 ** Try to convert pRec to an integer representation or a 276 ** floating-point representation if an integer representation 277 ** is not possible. Note that the integer representation is 278 ** always preferred, even if the affinity is REAL, because 279 ** an integer representation is more space efficient on disk. 280 ** 281 ** SQLITE_AFF_TEXT: 282 ** Convert pRec to a text representation. 283 ** 284 ** SQLITE_AFF_BLOB: 285 ** No-op. pRec is unchanged. 286 */ 287 static void applyAffinity( 288 Mem *pRec, /* The value to apply affinity to */ 289 char affinity, /* The affinity to be applied */ 290 u8 enc /* Use this text encoding */ 291 ){ 292 if( affinity>=SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC ){ 293 assert( affinity==SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER || affinity==SQLITE_AFF_REAL 294 || affinity==SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC ); 295 if( (pRec->flags & MEM_Int)==0 ){ /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-FALSE*/ 296 if( (pRec->flags & MEM_Real)==0 ){ 297 if( pRec->flags & MEM_Str ) applyNumericAffinity(pRec,1); 298 }else{ 299 sqlite3VdbeIntegerAffinity(pRec); 300 } 301 } 302 }else if( affinity==SQLITE_AFF_TEXT ){ 303 /* Only attempt the conversion to TEXT if there is an integer or real 304 ** representation (blob and NULL do not get converted) but no string 305 ** representation. It would be harmless to repeat the conversion if 306 ** there is already a string rep, but it is pointless to waste those 307 ** CPU cycles. */ 308 if( 0==(pRec->flags&MEM_Str) ){ /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-FALSE*/ 309 if( (pRec->flags&(MEM_Real|MEM_Int)) ){ 310 sqlite3VdbeMemStringify(pRec, enc, 1); 311 } 312 } 313 pRec->flags &= ~(MEM_Real|MEM_Int); 314 } 315 } 316 317 /* 318 ** Try to convert the type of a function argument or a result column 319 ** into a numeric representation. Use either INTEGER or REAL whichever 320 ** is appropriate. But only do the conversion if it is possible without 321 ** loss of information and return the revised type of the argument. 322 */ 323 int sqlite3_value_numeric_type(sqlite3_value *pVal){ 324 int eType = sqlite3_value_type(pVal); 325 if( eType==SQLITE_TEXT ){ 326 Mem *pMem = (Mem*)pVal; 327 applyNumericAffinity(pMem, 0); 328 eType = sqlite3_value_type(pVal); 329 } 330 return eType; 331 } 332 333 /* 334 ** Exported version of applyAffinity(). This one works on sqlite3_value*, 335 ** not the internal Mem* type. 336 */ 337 void sqlite3ValueApplyAffinity( 338 sqlite3_value *pVal, 339 u8 affinity, 340 u8 enc 341 ){ 342 applyAffinity((Mem *)pVal, affinity, enc); 343 } 344 345 /* 346 ** pMem currently only holds a string type (or maybe a BLOB that we can 347 ** interpret as a string if we want to). Compute its corresponding 348 ** numeric type, if has one. Set the pMem->u.r and pMem->u.i fields 349 ** accordingly. 350 */ 351 static u16 SQLITE_NOINLINE computeNumericType(Mem *pMem){ 352 assert( (pMem->flags & (MEM_Int|MEM_Real))==0 ); 353 assert( (pMem->flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Blob))!=0 ); 354 if( sqlite3AtoF(pMem->z, &pMem->u.r, pMem->n, pMem->enc)==0 ){ 355 return 0; 356 } 357 if( sqlite3Atoi64(pMem->z, &pMem->u.i, pMem->n, pMem->enc)==SQLITE_OK ){ 358 return MEM_Int; 359 } 360 return MEM_Real; 361 } 362 363 /* 364 ** Return the numeric type for pMem, either MEM_Int or MEM_Real or both or 365 ** none. 366 ** 367 ** Unlike applyNumericAffinity(), this routine does not modify pMem->flags. 368 ** But it does set pMem->u.r and pMem->u.i appropriately. 369 */ 370 static u16 numericType(Mem *pMem){ 371 if( pMem->flags & (MEM_Int|MEM_Real) ){ 372 return pMem->flags & (MEM_Int|MEM_Real); 373 } 374 if( pMem->flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Blob) ){ 375 return computeNumericType(pMem); 376 } 377 return 0; 378 } 379 380 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 381 /* 382 ** Write a nice string representation of the contents of cell pMem 383 ** into buffer zBuf, length nBuf. 384 */ 385 void sqlite3VdbeMemPrettyPrint(Mem *pMem, char *zBuf){ 386 char *zCsr = zBuf; 387 int f = pMem->flags; 388 389 static const char *const encnames[] = {"(X)", "(8)", "(16LE)", "(16BE)"}; 390 391 if( f&MEM_Blob ){ 392 int i; 393 char c; 394 if( f & MEM_Dyn ){ 395 c = 'z'; 396 assert( (f & (MEM_Static|MEM_Ephem))==0 ); 397 }else if( f & MEM_Static ){ 398 c = 't'; 399 assert( (f & (MEM_Dyn|MEM_Ephem))==0 ); 400 }else if( f & MEM_Ephem ){ 401 c = 'e'; 402 assert( (f & (MEM_Static|MEM_Dyn))==0 ); 403 }else{ 404 c = 's'; 405 } 406 407 sqlite3_snprintf(100, zCsr, "%c", c); 408 zCsr += sqlite3Strlen30(zCsr); 409 sqlite3_snprintf(100, zCsr, "%d[", pMem->n); 410 zCsr += sqlite3Strlen30(zCsr); 411 for(i=0; i<16 && i<pMem->n; i++){ 412 sqlite3_snprintf(100, zCsr, "%02X", ((int)pMem->z[i] & 0xFF)); 413 zCsr += sqlite3Strlen30(zCsr); 414 } 415 for(i=0; i<16 && i<pMem->n; i++){ 416 char z = pMem->z[i]; 417 if( z<32 || z>126 ) *zCsr++ = '.'; 418 else *zCsr++ = z; 419 } 420 421 sqlite3_snprintf(100, zCsr, "]%s", encnames[pMem->enc]); 422 zCsr += sqlite3Strlen30(zCsr); 423 if( f & MEM_Zero ){ 424 sqlite3_snprintf(100, zCsr,"+%dz",pMem->u.nZero); 425 zCsr += sqlite3Strlen30(zCsr); 426 } 427 *zCsr = '\0'; 428 }else if( f & MEM_Str ){ 429 int j, k; 430 zBuf[0] = ' '; 431 if( f & MEM_Dyn ){ 432 zBuf[1] = 'z'; 433 assert( (f & (MEM_Static|MEM_Ephem))==0 ); 434 }else if( f & MEM_Static ){ 435 zBuf[1] = 't'; 436 assert( (f & (MEM_Dyn|MEM_Ephem))==0 ); 437 }else if( f & MEM_Ephem ){ 438 zBuf[1] = 'e'; 439 assert( (f & (MEM_Static|MEM_Dyn))==0 ); 440 }else{ 441 zBuf[1] = 's'; 442 } 443 k = 2; 444 sqlite3_snprintf(100, &zBuf[k], "%d", pMem->n); 445 k += sqlite3Strlen30(&zBuf[k]); 446 zBuf[k++] = '['; 447 for(j=0; j<15 && j<pMem->n; j++){ 448 u8 c = pMem->z[j]; 449 if( c>=0x20 && c<0x7f ){ 450 zBuf[k++] = c; 451 }else{ 452 zBuf[k++] = '.'; 453 } 454 } 455 zBuf[k++] = ']'; 456 sqlite3_snprintf(100,&zBuf[k], encnames[pMem->enc]); 457 k += sqlite3Strlen30(&zBuf[k]); 458 zBuf[k++] = 0; 459 } 460 } 461 #endif 462 463 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 464 /* 465 ** Print the value of a register for tracing purposes: 466 */ 467 static void memTracePrint(Mem *p){ 468 if( p->flags & MEM_Undefined ){ 469 printf(" undefined"); 470 }else if( p->flags & MEM_Null ){ 471 printf(" NULL"); 472 }else if( (p->flags & (MEM_Int|MEM_Str))==(MEM_Int|MEM_Str) ){ 473 printf(" si:%lld", p->u.i); 474 }else if( p->flags & MEM_Int ){ 475 printf(" i:%lld", p->u.i); 476 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FLOATING_POINT 477 }else if( p->flags & MEM_Real ){ 478 printf(" r:%g", p->u.r); 479 #endif 480 }else if( p->flags & MEM_RowSet ){ 481 printf(" (rowset)"); 482 }else{ 483 char zBuf[200]; 484 sqlite3VdbeMemPrettyPrint(p, zBuf); 485 printf(" %s", zBuf); 486 } 487 if( p->flags & MEM_Subtype ) printf(" subtype=0x%02x", p->eSubtype); 488 } 489 static void registerTrace(int iReg, Mem *p){ 490 printf("REG[%d] = ", iReg); 491 memTracePrint(p); 492 printf("\n"); 493 } 494 #endif 495 496 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 497 # define REGISTER_TRACE(R,M) if(db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace)registerTrace(R,M) 498 #else 499 # define REGISTER_TRACE(R,M) 500 #endif 501 502 503 #ifdef VDBE_PROFILE 504 505 /* 506 ** hwtime.h contains inline assembler code for implementing 507 ** high-performance timing routines. 508 */ 509 #include "hwtime.h" 510 511 #endif 512 513 #ifndef NDEBUG 514 /* 515 ** This function is only called from within an assert() expression. It 516 ** checks that the sqlite3.nTransaction variable is correctly set to 517 ** the number of non-transaction savepoints currently in the 518 ** linked list starting at sqlite3.pSavepoint. 519 ** 520 ** Usage: 521 ** 522 ** assert( checkSavepointCount(db) ); 523 */ 524 static int checkSavepointCount(sqlite3 *db){ 525 int n = 0; 526 Savepoint *p; 527 for(p=db->pSavepoint; p; p=p->pNext) n++; 528 assert( n==(db->nSavepoint + db->isTransactionSavepoint) ); 529 return 1; 530 } 531 #endif 532 533 /* 534 ** Return the register of pOp->p2 after first preparing it to be 535 ** overwritten with an integer value. 536 */ 537 static SQLITE_NOINLINE Mem *out2PrereleaseWithClear(Mem *pOut){ 538 sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pOut); 539 pOut->flags = MEM_Int; 540 return pOut; 541 } 542 static Mem *out2Prerelease(Vdbe *p, VdbeOp *pOp){ 543 Mem *pOut; 544 assert( pOp->p2>0 ); 545 assert( pOp->p2<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); 546 pOut = &p->aMem[pOp->p2]; 547 memAboutToChange(p, pOut); 548 if( VdbeMemDynamic(pOut) ){ /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-FALSE*/ 549 return out2PrereleaseWithClear(pOut); 550 }else{ 551 pOut->flags = MEM_Int; 552 return pOut; 553 } 554 } 555 556 557 /* 558 ** Execute as much of a VDBE program as we can. 559 ** This is the core of sqlite3_step(). 560 */ 561 int sqlite3VdbeExec( 562 Vdbe *p /* The VDBE */ 563 ){ 564 Op *aOp = p->aOp; /* Copy of p->aOp */ 565 Op *pOp = aOp; /* Current operation */ 566 #if defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) || defined(VDBE_PROFILE) 567 Op *pOrigOp; /* Value of pOp at the top of the loop */ 568 #endif 569 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 570 int nExtraDelete = 0; /* Verifies FORDELETE and AUXDELETE flags */ 571 #endif 572 int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* Value to return */ 573 sqlite3 *db = p->db; /* The database */ 574 u8 resetSchemaOnFault = 0; /* Reset schema after an error if positive */ 575 u8 encoding = ENC(db); /* The database encoding */ 576 int iCompare = 0; /* Result of last OP_Compare operation */ 577 unsigned nVmStep = 0; /* Number of virtual machine steps */ 578 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PROGRESS_CALLBACK 579 unsigned nProgressLimit = 0;/* Invoke xProgress() when nVmStep reaches this */ 580 #endif 581 Mem *aMem = p->aMem; /* Copy of p->aMem */ 582 Mem *pIn1 = 0; /* 1st input operand */ 583 Mem *pIn2 = 0; /* 2nd input operand */ 584 Mem *pIn3 = 0; /* 3rd input operand */ 585 Mem *pOut = 0; /* Output operand */ 586 int *aPermute = 0; /* Permutation of columns for OP_Compare */ 587 i64 lastRowid = db->lastRowid; /* Saved value of the last insert ROWID */ 588 #ifdef VDBE_PROFILE 589 u64 start; /* CPU clock count at start of opcode */ 590 #endif 591 /*** INSERT STACK UNION HERE ***/ 592 593 assert( p->magic==VDBE_MAGIC_RUN ); /* sqlite3_step() verifies this */ 594 sqlite3VdbeEnter(p); 595 if( p->rc==SQLITE_NOMEM ){ 596 /* This happens if a malloc() inside a call to sqlite3_column_text() or 597 ** sqlite3_column_text16() failed. */ 598 goto no_mem; 599 } 600 assert( p->rc==SQLITE_OK || (p->rc&0xff)==SQLITE_BUSY ); 601 assert( p->bIsReader || p->readOnly!=0 ); 602 p->rc = SQLITE_OK; 603 p->iCurrentTime = 0; 604 assert( p->explain==0 ); 605 p->pResultSet = 0; 606 db->busyHandler.nBusy = 0; 607 if( db->u1.isInterrupted ) goto abort_due_to_interrupt; 608 sqlite3VdbeIOTraceSql(p); 609 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PROGRESS_CALLBACK 610 if( db->xProgress ){ 611 u32 iPrior = p->aCounter[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_VM_STEP]; 612 assert( 0 < db->nProgressOps ); 613 nProgressLimit = db->nProgressOps - (iPrior % db->nProgressOps); 614 } 615 #endif 616 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 617 sqlite3BeginBenignMalloc(); 618 if( p->pc==0 619 && (p->db->flags & (SQLITE_VdbeListing|SQLITE_VdbeEQP|SQLITE_VdbeTrace))!=0 620 ){ 621 int i; 622 int once = 1; 623 sqlite3VdbePrintSql(p); 624 if( p->db->flags & SQLITE_VdbeListing ){ 625 printf("VDBE Program Listing:\n"); 626 for(i=0; i<p->nOp; i++){ 627 sqlite3VdbePrintOp(stdout, i, &aOp[i]); 628 } 629 } 630 if( p->db->flags & SQLITE_VdbeEQP ){ 631 for(i=0; i<p->nOp; i++){ 632 if( aOp[i].opcode==OP_Explain ){ 633 if( once ) printf("VDBE Query Plan:\n"); 634 printf("%s\n", aOp[i].p4.z); 635 once = 0; 636 } 637 } 638 } 639 if( p->db->flags & SQLITE_VdbeTrace ) printf("VDBE Trace:\n"); 640 } 641 sqlite3EndBenignMalloc(); 642 #endif 643 for(pOp=&aOp[p->pc]; 1; pOp++){ 644 /* Errors are detected by individual opcodes, with an immediate 645 ** jumps to abort_due_to_error. */ 646 assert( rc==SQLITE_OK ); 647 648 assert( pOp>=aOp && pOp<&aOp[p->nOp]); 649 #ifdef VDBE_PROFILE 650 start = sqlite3Hwtime(); 651 #endif 652 nVmStep++; 653 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS 654 if( p->anExec ) p->anExec[(int)(pOp-aOp)]++; 655 #endif 656 657 /* Only allow tracing if SQLITE_DEBUG is defined. 658 */ 659 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 660 if( db->flags & SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){ 661 sqlite3VdbePrintOp(stdout, (int)(pOp - aOp), pOp); 662 } 663 #endif 664 665 666 /* Check to see if we need to simulate an interrupt. This only happens 667 ** if we have a special test build. 668 */ 669 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST 670 if( sqlite3_interrupt_count>0 ){ 671 sqlite3_interrupt_count--; 672 if( sqlite3_interrupt_count==0 ){ 673 sqlite3_interrupt(db); 674 } 675 } 676 #endif 677 678 /* Sanity checking on other operands */ 679 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 680 { 681 u8 opProperty = sqlite3OpcodeProperty[pOp->opcode]; 682 if( (opProperty & OPFLG_IN1)!=0 ){ 683 assert( pOp->p1>0 ); 684 assert( pOp->p1<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); 685 assert( memIsValid(&aMem[pOp->p1]) ); 686 assert( sqlite3VdbeCheckMemInvariants(&aMem[pOp->p1]) ); 687 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p1, &aMem[pOp->p1]); 688 } 689 if( (opProperty & OPFLG_IN2)!=0 ){ 690 assert( pOp->p2>0 ); 691 assert( pOp->p2<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); 692 assert( memIsValid(&aMem[pOp->p2]) ); 693 assert( sqlite3VdbeCheckMemInvariants(&aMem[pOp->p2]) ); 694 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p2, &aMem[pOp->p2]); 695 } 696 if( (opProperty & OPFLG_IN3)!=0 ){ 697 assert( pOp->p3>0 ); 698 assert( pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); 699 assert( memIsValid(&aMem[pOp->p3]) ); 700 assert( sqlite3VdbeCheckMemInvariants(&aMem[pOp->p3]) ); 701 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, &aMem[pOp->p3]); 702 } 703 if( (opProperty & OPFLG_OUT2)!=0 ){ 704 assert( pOp->p2>0 ); 705 assert( pOp->p2<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); 706 memAboutToChange(p, &aMem[pOp->p2]); 707 } 708 if( (opProperty & OPFLG_OUT3)!=0 ){ 709 assert( pOp->p3>0 ); 710 assert( pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); 711 memAboutToChange(p, &aMem[pOp->p3]); 712 } 713 } 714 #endif 715 #if defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) || defined(VDBE_PROFILE) 716 pOrigOp = pOp; 717 #endif 718 719 switch( pOp->opcode ){ 720 721 /***************************************************************************** 722 ** What follows is a massive switch statement where each case implements a 723 ** separate instruction in the virtual machine. If we follow the usual 724 ** indentation conventions, each case should be indented by 6 spaces. But 725 ** that is a lot of wasted space on the left margin. So the code within 726 ** the switch statement will break with convention and be flush-left. Another 727 ** big comment (similar to this one) will mark the point in the code where 728 ** we transition back to normal indentation. 729 ** 730 ** The formatting of each case is important. The makefile for SQLite 731 ** generates two C files "opcodes.h" and "opcodes.c" by scanning this 732 ** file looking for lines that begin with "case OP_". The opcodes.h files 733 ** will be filled with #defines that give unique integer values to each 734 ** opcode and the opcodes.c file is filled with an array of strings where 735 ** each string is the symbolic name for the corresponding opcode. If the 736 ** case statement is followed by a comment of the form "/# same as ... #/" 737 ** that comment is used to determine the particular value of the opcode. 738 ** 739 ** Other keywords in the comment that follows each case are used to 740 ** construct the OPFLG_INITIALIZER value that initializes opcodeProperty[]. 741 ** Keywords include: in1, in2, in3, out2, out3. See 742 ** the mkopcodeh.awk script for additional information. 743 ** 744 ** Documentation about VDBE opcodes is generated by scanning this file 745 ** for lines of that contain "Opcode:". That line and all subsequent 746 ** comment lines are used in the generation of the opcode.html documentation 747 ** file. 748 ** 749 ** SUMMARY: 750 ** 751 ** Formatting is important to scripts that scan this file. 752 ** Do not deviate from the formatting style currently in use. 753 ** 754 *****************************************************************************/ 755 756 /* Opcode: Goto * P2 * * * 757 ** 758 ** An unconditional jump to address P2. 759 ** The next instruction executed will be 760 ** the one at index P2 from the beginning of 761 ** the program. 762 ** 763 ** The P1 parameter is not actually used by this opcode. However, it 764 ** is sometimes set to 1 instead of 0 as a hint to the command-line shell 765 ** that this Goto is the bottom of a loop and that the lines from P2 down 766 ** to the current line should be indented for EXPLAIN output. 767 */ 768 case OP_Goto: { /* jump */ 769 jump_to_p2_and_check_for_interrupt: 770 pOp = &aOp[pOp->p2 - 1]; 771 772 /* Opcodes that are used as the bottom of a loop (OP_Next, OP_Prev, 773 ** OP_VNext, OP_RowSetNext, or OP_SorterNext) all jump here upon 774 ** completion. Check to see if sqlite3_interrupt() has been called 775 ** or if the progress callback needs to be invoked. 776 ** 777 ** This code uses unstructured "goto" statements and does not look clean. 778 ** But that is not due to sloppy coding habits. The code is written this 779 ** way for performance, to avoid having to run the interrupt and progress 780 ** checks on every opcode. This helps sqlite3_step() to run about 1.5% 781 ** faster according to "valgrind --tool=cachegrind" */ 782 check_for_interrupt: 783 if( db->u1.isInterrupted ) goto abort_due_to_interrupt; 784 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PROGRESS_CALLBACK 785 /* Call the progress callback if it is configured and the required number 786 ** of VDBE ops have been executed (either since this invocation of 787 ** sqlite3VdbeExec() or since last time the progress callback was called). 788 ** If the progress callback returns non-zero, exit the virtual machine with 789 ** a return code SQLITE_ABORT. 790 */ 791 if( db->xProgress!=0 && nVmStep>=nProgressLimit ){ 792 assert( db->nProgressOps!=0 ); 793 nProgressLimit = nVmStep + db->nProgressOps - (nVmStep%db->nProgressOps); 794 if( db->xProgress(db->pProgressArg) ){ 795 rc = SQLITE_INTERRUPT; 796 goto abort_due_to_error; 797 } 798 } 799 #endif 800 801 break; 802 } 803 804 /* Opcode: Gosub P1 P2 * * * 805 ** 806 ** Write the current address onto register P1 807 ** and then jump to address P2. 808 */ 809 case OP_Gosub: { /* jump */ 810 assert( pOp->p1>0 && pOp->p1<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); 811 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 812 assert( VdbeMemDynamic(pIn1)==0 ); 813 memAboutToChange(p, pIn1); 814 pIn1->flags = MEM_Int; 815 pIn1->u.i = (int)(pOp-aOp); 816 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p1, pIn1); 817 818 /* Most jump operations do a goto to this spot in order to update 819 ** the pOp pointer. */ 820 jump_to_p2: 821 pOp = &aOp[pOp->p2 - 1]; 822 break; 823 } 824 825 /* Opcode: Return P1 * * * * 826 ** 827 ** Jump to the next instruction after the address in register P1. After 828 ** the jump, register P1 becomes undefined. 829 */ 830 case OP_Return: { /* in1 */ 831 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 832 assert( pIn1->flags==MEM_Int ); 833 pOp = &aOp[pIn1->u.i]; 834 pIn1->flags = MEM_Undefined; 835 break; 836 } 837 838 /* Opcode: InitCoroutine P1 P2 P3 * * 839 ** 840 ** Set up register P1 so that it will Yield to the coroutine 841 ** located at address P3. 842 ** 843 ** If P2!=0 then the coroutine implementation immediately follows 844 ** this opcode. So jump over the coroutine implementation to 845 ** address P2. 846 ** 847 ** See also: EndCoroutine 848 */ 849 case OP_InitCoroutine: { /* jump */ 850 assert( pOp->p1>0 && pOp->p1<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); 851 assert( pOp->p2>=0 && pOp->p2<p->nOp ); 852 assert( pOp->p3>=0 && pOp->p3<p->nOp ); 853 pOut = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 854 assert( !VdbeMemDynamic(pOut) ); 855 pOut->u.i = pOp->p3 - 1; 856 pOut->flags = MEM_Int; 857 if( pOp->p2 ) goto jump_to_p2; 858 break; 859 } 860 861 /* Opcode: EndCoroutine P1 * * * * 862 ** 863 ** The instruction at the address in register P1 is a Yield. 864 ** Jump to the P2 parameter of that Yield. 865 ** After the jump, register P1 becomes undefined. 866 ** 867 ** See also: InitCoroutine 868 */ 869 case OP_EndCoroutine: { /* in1 */ 870 VdbeOp *pCaller; 871 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 872 assert( pIn1->flags==MEM_Int ); 873 assert( pIn1->u.i>=0 && pIn1->u.i<p->nOp ); 874 pCaller = &aOp[pIn1->u.i]; 875 assert( pCaller->opcode==OP_Yield ); 876 assert( pCaller->p2>=0 && pCaller->p2<p->nOp ); 877 pOp = &aOp[pCaller->p2 - 1]; 878 pIn1->flags = MEM_Undefined; 879 break; 880 } 881 882 /* Opcode: Yield P1 P2 * * * 883 ** 884 ** Swap the program counter with the value in register P1. This 885 ** has the effect of yielding to a coroutine. 886 ** 887 ** If the coroutine that is launched by this instruction ends with 888 ** Yield or Return then continue to the next instruction. But if 889 ** the coroutine launched by this instruction ends with 890 ** EndCoroutine, then jump to P2 rather than continuing with the 891 ** next instruction. 892 ** 893 ** See also: InitCoroutine 894 */ 895 case OP_Yield: { /* in1, jump */ 896 int pcDest; 897 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 898 assert( VdbeMemDynamic(pIn1)==0 ); 899 pIn1->flags = MEM_Int; 900 pcDest = (int)pIn1->u.i; 901 pIn1->u.i = (int)(pOp - aOp); 902 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p1, pIn1); 903 pOp = &aOp[pcDest]; 904 break; 905 } 906 907 /* Opcode: HaltIfNull P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 908 ** Synopsis: if r[P3]=null halt 909 ** 910 ** Check the value in register P3. If it is NULL then Halt using 911 ** parameter P1, P2, and P4 as if this were a Halt instruction. If the 912 ** value in register P3 is not NULL, then this routine is a no-op. 913 ** The P5 parameter should be 1. 914 */ 915 case OP_HaltIfNull: { /* in3 */ 916 pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 917 if( (pIn3->flags & MEM_Null)==0 ) break; 918 /* Fall through into OP_Halt */ 919 } 920 921 /* Opcode: Halt P1 P2 * P4 P5 922 ** 923 ** Exit immediately. All open cursors, etc are closed 924 ** automatically. 925 ** 926 ** P1 is the result code returned by sqlite3_exec(), sqlite3_reset(), 927 ** or sqlite3_finalize(). For a normal halt, this should be SQLITE_OK (0). 928 ** For errors, it can be some other value. If P1!=0 then P2 will determine 929 ** whether or not to rollback the current transaction. Do not rollback 930 ** if P2==OE_Fail. Do the rollback if P2==OE_Rollback. If P2==OE_Abort, 931 ** then back out all changes that have occurred during this execution of the 932 ** VDBE, but do not rollback the transaction. 933 ** 934 ** If P4 is not null then it is an error message string. 935 ** 936 ** P5 is a value between 0 and 4, inclusive, that modifies the P4 string. 937 ** 938 ** 0: (no change) 939 ** 1: NOT NULL contraint failed: P4 940 ** 2: UNIQUE constraint failed: P4 941 ** 3: CHECK constraint failed: P4 942 ** 4: FOREIGN KEY constraint failed: P4 943 ** 944 ** If P5 is not zero and P4 is NULL, then everything after the ":" is 945 ** omitted. 946 ** 947 ** There is an implied "Halt 0 0 0" instruction inserted at the very end of 948 ** every program. So a jump past the last instruction of the program 949 ** is the same as executing Halt. 950 */ 951 case OP_Halt: { 952 VdbeFrame *pFrame; 953 int pcx; 954 955 pcx = (int)(pOp - aOp); 956 if( pOp->p1==SQLITE_OK && p->pFrame ){ 957 /* Halt the sub-program. Return control to the parent frame. */ 958 pFrame = p->pFrame; 959 p->pFrame = pFrame->pParent; 960 p->nFrame--; 961 sqlite3VdbeSetChanges(db, p->nChange); 962 pcx = sqlite3VdbeFrameRestore(pFrame); 963 lastRowid = db->lastRowid; 964 if( pOp->p2==OE_Ignore ){ 965 /* Instruction pcx is the OP_Program that invoked the sub-program 966 ** currently being halted. If the p2 instruction of this OP_Halt 967 ** instruction is set to OE_Ignore, then the sub-program is throwing 968 ** an IGNORE exception. In this case jump to the address specified 969 ** as the p2 of the calling OP_Program. */ 970 pcx = p->aOp[pcx].p2-1; 971 } 972 aOp = p->aOp; 973 aMem = p->aMem; 974 pOp = &aOp[pcx]; 975 break; 976 } 977 p->rc = pOp->p1; 978 p->errorAction = (u8)pOp->p2; 979 p->pc = pcx; 980 assert( pOp->p5>=0 && pOp->p5<=4 ); 981 if( p->rc ){ 982 if( pOp->p5 ){ 983 static const char * const azType[] = { "NOT NULL", "UNIQUE", "CHECK", 984 "FOREIGN KEY" }; 985 testcase( pOp->p5==1 ); 986 testcase( pOp->p5==2 ); 987 testcase( pOp->p5==3 ); 988 testcase( pOp->p5==4 ); 989 sqlite3VdbeError(p, "%s constraint failed", azType[pOp->p5-1]); 990 if( pOp->p4.z ){ 991 p->zErrMsg = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "%z: %s", p->zErrMsg, pOp->p4.z); 992 } 993 }else{ 994 sqlite3VdbeError(p, "%s", pOp->p4.z); 995 } 996 sqlite3_log(pOp->p1, "abort at %d in [%s]: %s", pcx, p->zSql, p->zErrMsg); 997 } 998 rc = sqlite3VdbeHalt(p); 999 assert( rc==SQLITE_BUSY || rc==SQLITE_OK || rc==SQLITE_ERROR ); 1000 if( rc==SQLITE_BUSY ){ 1001 p->rc = SQLITE_BUSY; 1002 }else{ 1003 assert( rc==SQLITE_OK || (p->rc&0xff)==SQLITE_CONSTRAINT ); 1004 assert( rc==SQLITE_OK || db->nDeferredCons>0 || db->nDeferredImmCons>0 ); 1005 rc = p->rc ? SQLITE_ERROR : SQLITE_DONE; 1006 } 1007 goto vdbe_return; 1008 } 1009 1010 /* Opcode: Integer P1 P2 * * * 1011 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=P1 1012 ** 1013 ** The 32-bit integer value P1 is written into register P2. 1014 */ 1015 case OP_Integer: { /* out2 */ 1016 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 1017 pOut->u.i = pOp->p1; 1018 break; 1019 } 1020 1021 /* Opcode: Int64 * P2 * P4 * 1022 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=P4 1023 ** 1024 ** P4 is a pointer to a 64-bit integer value. 1025 ** Write that value into register P2. 1026 */ 1027 case OP_Int64: { /* out2 */ 1028 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 1029 assert( pOp->p4.pI64!=0 ); 1030 pOut->u.i = *pOp->p4.pI64; 1031 break; 1032 } 1033 1034 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FLOATING_POINT 1035 /* Opcode: Real * P2 * P4 * 1036 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=P4 1037 ** 1038 ** P4 is a pointer to a 64-bit floating point value. 1039 ** Write that value into register P2. 1040 */ 1041 case OP_Real: { /* same as TK_FLOAT, out2 */ 1042 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 1043 pOut->flags = MEM_Real; 1044 assert( !sqlite3IsNaN(*pOp->p4.pReal) ); 1045 pOut->u.r = *pOp->p4.pReal; 1046 break; 1047 } 1048 #endif 1049 1050 /* Opcode: String8 * P2 * P4 * 1051 ** Synopsis: r[P2]='P4' 1052 ** 1053 ** P4 points to a nul terminated UTF-8 string. This opcode is transformed 1054 ** into a String opcode before it is executed for the first time. During 1055 ** this transformation, the length of string P4 is computed and stored 1056 ** as the P1 parameter. 1057 */ 1058 case OP_String8: { /* same as TK_STRING, out2 */ 1059 assert( pOp->p4.z!=0 ); 1060 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 1061 pOp->opcode = OP_String; 1062 pOp->p1 = sqlite3Strlen30(pOp->p4.z); 1063 1064 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16 1065 if( encoding!=SQLITE_UTF8 ){ 1066 rc = sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pOut, pOp->p4.z, -1, SQLITE_UTF8, SQLITE_STATIC); 1067 assert( rc==SQLITE_OK || rc==SQLITE_TOOBIG ); 1068 if( SQLITE_OK!=sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(pOut, encoding) ) goto no_mem; 1069 assert( pOut->szMalloc>0 && pOut->zMalloc==pOut->z ); 1070 assert( VdbeMemDynamic(pOut)==0 ); 1071 pOut->szMalloc = 0; 1072 pOut->flags |= MEM_Static; 1073 if( pOp->p4type==P4_DYNAMIC ){ 1074 sqlite3DbFree(db, pOp->p4.z); 1075 } 1076 pOp->p4type = P4_DYNAMIC; 1077 pOp->p4.z = pOut->z; 1078 pOp->p1 = pOut->n; 1079 } 1080 testcase( rc==SQLITE_TOOBIG ); 1081 #endif 1082 if( pOp->p1>db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_LENGTH] ){ 1083 goto too_big; 1084 } 1085 assert( rc==SQLITE_OK ); 1086 /* Fall through to the next case, OP_String */ 1087 } 1088 1089 /* Opcode: String P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 1090 ** Synopsis: r[P2]='P4' (len=P1) 1091 ** 1092 ** The string value P4 of length P1 (bytes) is stored in register P2. 1093 ** 1094 ** If P3 is not zero and the content of register P3 is equal to P5, then 1095 ** the datatype of the register P2 is converted to BLOB. The content is 1096 ** the same sequence of bytes, it is merely interpreted as a BLOB instead 1097 ** of a string, as if it had been CAST. In other words: 1098 ** 1099 ** if( P3!=0 and reg[P3]==P5 ) reg[P2] := CAST(reg[P2] as BLOB) 1100 */ 1101 case OP_String: { /* out2 */ 1102 assert( pOp->p4.z!=0 ); 1103 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 1104 pOut->flags = MEM_Str|MEM_Static|MEM_Term; 1105 pOut->z = pOp->p4.z; 1106 pOut->n = pOp->p1; 1107 pOut->enc = encoding; 1108 UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pOut); 1109 #ifndef SQLITE_LIKE_DOESNT_MATCH_BLOBS 1110 if( pOp->p3>0 ){ 1111 assert( pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); 1112 pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 1113 assert( pIn3->flags & MEM_Int ); 1114 if( pIn3->u.i==pOp->p5 ) pOut->flags = MEM_Blob|MEM_Static|MEM_Term; 1115 } 1116 #endif 1117 break; 1118 } 1119 1120 /* Opcode: Null P1 P2 P3 * * 1121 ** Synopsis: r[P2..P3]=NULL 1122 ** 1123 ** Write a NULL into registers P2. If P3 greater than P2, then also write 1124 ** NULL into register P3 and every register in between P2 and P3. If P3 1125 ** is less than P2 (typically P3 is zero) then only register P2 is 1126 ** set to NULL. 1127 ** 1128 ** If the P1 value is non-zero, then also set the MEM_Cleared flag so that 1129 ** NULL values will not compare equal even if SQLITE_NULLEQ is set on 1130 ** OP_Ne or OP_Eq. 1131 */ 1132 case OP_Null: { /* out2 */ 1133 int cnt; 1134 u16 nullFlag; 1135 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 1136 cnt = pOp->p3-pOp->p2; 1137 assert( pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); 1138 pOut->flags = nullFlag = pOp->p1 ? (MEM_Null|MEM_Cleared) : MEM_Null; 1139 while( cnt>0 ){ 1140 pOut++; 1141 memAboutToChange(p, pOut); 1142 sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pOut); 1143 pOut->flags = nullFlag; 1144 cnt--; 1145 } 1146 break; 1147 } 1148 1149 /* Opcode: SoftNull P1 * * * * 1150 ** Synopsis: r[P1]=NULL 1151 ** 1152 ** Set register P1 to have the value NULL as seen by the OP_MakeRecord 1153 ** instruction, but do not free any string or blob memory associated with 1154 ** the register, so that if the value was a string or blob that was 1155 ** previously copied using OP_SCopy, the copies will continue to be valid. 1156 */ 1157 case OP_SoftNull: { 1158 assert( pOp->p1>0 && pOp->p1<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); 1159 pOut = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 1160 pOut->flags = (pOut->flags|MEM_Null)&~MEM_Undefined; 1161 break; 1162 } 1163 1164 /* Opcode: Blob P1 P2 * P4 * 1165 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=P4 (len=P1) 1166 ** 1167 ** P4 points to a blob of data P1 bytes long. Store this 1168 ** blob in register P2. 1169 */ 1170 case OP_Blob: { /* out2 */ 1171 assert( pOp->p1 <= SQLITE_MAX_LENGTH ); 1172 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 1173 sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pOut, pOp->p4.z, pOp->p1, 0, 0); 1174 pOut->enc = encoding; 1175 UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pOut); 1176 break; 1177 } 1178 1179 /* Opcode: Variable P1 P2 * P4 * 1180 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=parameter(P1,P4) 1181 ** 1182 ** Transfer the values of bound parameter P1 into register P2 1183 ** 1184 ** If the parameter is named, then its name appears in P4. 1185 ** The P4 value is used by sqlite3_bind_parameter_name(). 1186 */ 1187 case OP_Variable: { /* out2 */ 1188 Mem *pVar; /* Value being transferred */ 1189 1190 assert( pOp->p1>0 && pOp->p1<=p->nVar ); 1191 assert( pOp->p4.z==0 || pOp->p4.z==p->azVar[pOp->p1-1] ); 1192 pVar = &p->aVar[pOp->p1 - 1]; 1193 if( sqlite3VdbeMemTooBig(pVar) ){ 1194 goto too_big; 1195 } 1196 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 1197 sqlite3VdbeMemShallowCopy(pOut, pVar, MEM_Static); 1198 UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pOut); 1199 break; 1200 } 1201 1202 /* Opcode: Move P1 P2 P3 * * 1203 ** Synopsis: r[P2@P3]=r[P1@P3] 1204 ** 1205 ** Move the P3 values in register P1..P1+P3-1 over into 1206 ** registers P2..P2+P3-1. Registers P1..P1+P3-1 are 1207 ** left holding a NULL. It is an error for register ranges 1208 ** P1..P1+P3-1 and P2..P2+P3-1 to overlap. It is an error 1209 ** for P3 to be less than 1. 1210 */ 1211 case OP_Move: { 1212 int n; /* Number of registers left to copy */ 1213 int p1; /* Register to copy from */ 1214 int p2; /* Register to copy to */ 1215 1216 n = pOp->p3; 1217 p1 = pOp->p1; 1218 p2 = pOp->p2; 1219 assert( n>0 && p1>0 && p2>0 ); 1220 assert( p1+n<=p2 || p2+n<=p1 ); 1221 1222 pIn1 = &aMem[p1]; 1223 pOut = &aMem[p2]; 1224 do{ 1225 assert( pOut<=&aMem[(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)] ); 1226 assert( pIn1<=&aMem[(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)] ); 1227 assert( memIsValid(pIn1) ); 1228 memAboutToChange(p, pOut); 1229 sqlite3VdbeMemMove(pOut, pIn1); 1230 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 1231 if( pOut->pScopyFrom>=&aMem[p1] && pOut->pScopyFrom<pOut ){ 1232 pOut->pScopyFrom += pOp->p2 - p1; 1233 } 1234 #endif 1235 Deephemeralize(pOut); 1236 REGISTER_TRACE(p2++, pOut); 1237 pIn1++; 1238 pOut++; 1239 }while( --n ); 1240 break; 1241 } 1242 1243 /* Opcode: Copy P1 P2 P3 * * 1244 ** Synopsis: r[P2@P3+1]=r[P1@P3+1] 1245 ** 1246 ** Make a copy of registers P1..P1+P3 into registers P2..P2+P3. 1247 ** 1248 ** This instruction makes a deep copy of the value. A duplicate 1249 ** is made of any string or blob constant. See also OP_SCopy. 1250 */ 1251 case OP_Copy: { 1252 int n; 1253 1254 n = pOp->p3; 1255 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 1256 pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 1257 assert( pOut!=pIn1 ); 1258 while( 1 ){ 1259 sqlite3VdbeMemShallowCopy(pOut, pIn1, MEM_Ephem); 1260 Deephemeralize(pOut); 1261 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 1262 pOut->pScopyFrom = 0; 1263 #endif 1264 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p2+pOp->p3-n, pOut); 1265 if( (n--)==0 ) break; 1266 pOut++; 1267 pIn1++; 1268 } 1269 break; 1270 } 1271 1272 /* Opcode: SCopy P1 P2 * * * 1273 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=r[P1] 1274 ** 1275 ** Make a shallow copy of register P1 into register P2. 1276 ** 1277 ** This instruction makes a shallow copy of the value. If the value 1278 ** is a string or blob, then the copy is only a pointer to the 1279 ** original and hence if the original changes so will the copy. 1280 ** Worse, if the original is deallocated, the copy becomes invalid. 1281 ** Thus the program must guarantee that the original will not change 1282 ** during the lifetime of the copy. Use OP_Copy to make a complete 1283 ** copy. 1284 */ 1285 case OP_SCopy: { /* out2 */ 1286 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 1287 pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 1288 assert( pOut!=pIn1 ); 1289 sqlite3VdbeMemShallowCopy(pOut, pIn1, MEM_Ephem); 1290 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 1291 if( pOut->pScopyFrom==0 ) pOut->pScopyFrom = pIn1; 1292 #endif 1293 break; 1294 } 1295 1296 /* Opcode: IntCopy P1 P2 * * * 1297 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=r[P1] 1298 ** 1299 ** Transfer the integer value held in register P1 into register P2. 1300 ** 1301 ** This is an optimized version of SCopy that works only for integer 1302 ** values. 1303 */ 1304 case OP_IntCopy: { /* out2 */ 1305 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 1306 assert( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Int)!=0 ); 1307 pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 1308 sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pOut, pIn1->u.i); 1309 break; 1310 } 1311 1312 /* Opcode: ResultRow P1 P2 * * * 1313 ** Synopsis: output=r[P1@P2] 1314 ** 1315 ** The registers P1 through P1+P2-1 contain a single row of 1316 ** results. This opcode causes the sqlite3_step() call to terminate 1317 ** with an SQLITE_ROW return code and it sets up the sqlite3_stmt 1318 ** structure to provide access to the r(P1)..r(P1+P2-1) values as 1319 ** the result row. 1320 */ 1321 case OP_ResultRow: { 1322 Mem *pMem; 1323 int i; 1324 assert( p->nResColumn==pOp->p2 ); 1325 assert( pOp->p1>0 ); 1326 assert( pOp->p1+pOp->p2<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)+1 ); 1327 1328 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PROGRESS_CALLBACK 1329 /* Run the progress counter just before returning. 1330 */ 1331 if( db->xProgress!=0 1332 && nVmStep>=nProgressLimit 1333 && db->xProgress(db->pProgressArg)!=0 1334 ){ 1335 rc = SQLITE_INTERRUPT; 1336 goto abort_due_to_error; 1337 } 1338 #endif 1339 1340 /* If this statement has violated immediate foreign key constraints, do 1341 ** not return the number of rows modified. And do not RELEASE the statement 1342 ** transaction. It needs to be rolled back. */ 1343 if( SQLITE_OK!=(rc = sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(p, 0)) ){ 1344 assert( db->flags&SQLITE_CountRows ); 1345 assert( p->usesStmtJournal ); 1346 goto abort_due_to_error; 1347 } 1348 1349 /* If the SQLITE_CountRows flag is set in sqlite3.flags mask, then 1350 ** DML statements invoke this opcode to return the number of rows 1351 ** modified to the user. This is the only way that a VM that 1352 ** opens a statement transaction may invoke this opcode. 1353 ** 1354 ** In case this is such a statement, close any statement transaction 1355 ** opened by this VM before returning control to the user. This is to 1356 ** ensure that statement-transactions are always nested, not overlapping. 1357 ** If the open statement-transaction is not closed here, then the user 1358 ** may step another VM that opens its own statement transaction. This 1359 ** may lead to overlapping statement transactions. 1360 ** 1361 ** The statement transaction is never a top-level transaction. Hence 1362 ** the RELEASE call below can never fail. 1363 */ 1364 assert( p->iStatement==0 || db->flags&SQLITE_CountRows ); 1365 rc = sqlite3VdbeCloseStatement(p, SAVEPOINT_RELEASE); 1366 assert( rc==SQLITE_OK ); 1367 1368 /* Invalidate all ephemeral cursor row caches */ 1369 p->cacheCtr = (p->cacheCtr + 2)|1; 1370 1371 /* Make sure the results of the current row are \000 terminated 1372 ** and have an assigned type. The results are de-ephemeralized as 1373 ** a side effect. 1374 */ 1375 pMem = p->pResultSet = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 1376 for(i=0; i<pOp->p2; i++){ 1377 assert( memIsValid(&pMem[i]) ); 1378 Deephemeralize(&pMem[i]); 1379 assert( (pMem[i].flags & MEM_Ephem)==0 1380 || (pMem[i].flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Blob))==0 ); 1381 sqlite3VdbeMemNulTerminate(&pMem[i]); 1382 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p1+i, &pMem[i]); 1383 } 1384 if( db->mallocFailed ) goto no_mem; 1385 1386 if( db->mTrace & SQLITE_TRACE_ROW ){ 1387 db->xTrace(SQLITE_TRACE_ROW, db->pTraceArg, p, 0); 1388 } 1389 1390 /* Return SQLITE_ROW 1391 */ 1392 p->pc = (int)(pOp - aOp) + 1; 1393 rc = SQLITE_ROW; 1394 goto vdbe_return; 1395 } 1396 1397 /* Opcode: Concat P1 P2 P3 * * 1398 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]+r[P1] 1399 ** 1400 ** Add the text in register P1 onto the end of the text in 1401 ** register P2 and store the result in register P3. 1402 ** If either the P1 or P2 text are NULL then store NULL in P3. 1403 ** 1404 ** P3 = P2 || P1 1405 ** 1406 ** It is illegal for P1 and P3 to be the same register. Sometimes, 1407 ** if P3 is the same register as P2, the implementation is able 1408 ** to avoid a memcpy(). 1409 */ 1410 case OP_Concat: { /* same as TK_CONCAT, in1, in2, out3 */ 1411 i64 nByte; 1412 1413 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 1414 pIn2 = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 1415 pOut = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 1416 assert( pIn1!=pOut ); 1417 if( (pIn1->flags | pIn2->flags) & MEM_Null ){ 1418 sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pOut); 1419 break; 1420 } 1421 if( ExpandBlob(pIn1) || ExpandBlob(pIn2) ) goto no_mem; 1422 Stringify(pIn1, encoding); 1423 Stringify(pIn2, encoding); 1424 nByte = pIn1->n + pIn2->n; 1425 if( nByte>db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_LENGTH] ){ 1426 goto too_big; 1427 } 1428 if( sqlite3VdbeMemGrow(pOut, (int)nByte+2, pOut==pIn2) ){ 1429 goto no_mem; 1430 } 1431 MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Str); 1432 if( pOut!=pIn2 ){ 1433 memcpy(pOut->z, pIn2->z, pIn2->n); 1434 } 1435 memcpy(&pOut->z[pIn2->n], pIn1->z, pIn1->n); 1436 pOut->z[nByte]=0; 1437 pOut->z[nByte+1] = 0; 1438 pOut->flags |= MEM_Term; 1439 pOut->n = (int)nByte; 1440 pOut->enc = encoding; 1441 UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pOut); 1442 break; 1443 } 1444 1445 /* Opcode: Add P1 P2 P3 * * 1446 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P1]+r[P2] 1447 ** 1448 ** Add the value in register P1 to the value in register P2 1449 ** and store the result in register P3. 1450 ** If either input is NULL, the result is NULL. 1451 */ 1452 /* Opcode: Multiply P1 P2 P3 * * 1453 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P1]*r[P2] 1454 ** 1455 ** 1456 ** Multiply the value in register P1 by the value in register P2 1457 ** and store the result in register P3. 1458 ** If either input is NULL, the result is NULL. 1459 */ 1460 /* Opcode: Subtract P1 P2 P3 * * 1461 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]-r[P1] 1462 ** 1463 ** Subtract the value in register P1 from the value in register P2 1464 ** and store the result in register P3. 1465 ** If either input is NULL, the result is NULL. 1466 */ 1467 /* Opcode: Divide P1 P2 P3 * * 1468 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]/r[P1] 1469 ** 1470 ** Divide the value in register P1 by the value in register P2 1471 ** and store the result in register P3 (P3=P2/P1). If the value in 1472 ** register P1 is zero, then the result is NULL. If either input is 1473 ** NULL, the result is NULL. 1474 */ 1475 /* Opcode: Remainder P1 P2 P3 * * 1476 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]%r[P1] 1477 ** 1478 ** Compute the remainder after integer register P2 is divided by 1479 ** register P1 and store the result in register P3. 1480 ** If the value in register P1 is zero the result is NULL. 1481 ** If either operand is NULL, the result is NULL. 1482 */ 1483 case OP_Add: /* same as TK_PLUS, in1, in2, out3 */ 1484 case OP_Subtract: /* same as TK_MINUS, in1, in2, out3 */ 1485 case OP_Multiply: /* same as TK_STAR, in1, in2, out3 */ 1486 case OP_Divide: /* same as TK_SLASH, in1, in2, out3 */ 1487 case OP_Remainder: { /* same as TK_REM, in1, in2, out3 */ 1488 char bIntint; /* Started out as two integer operands */ 1489 u16 flags; /* Combined MEM_* flags from both inputs */ 1490 u16 type1; /* Numeric type of left operand */ 1491 u16 type2; /* Numeric type of right operand */ 1492 i64 iA; /* Integer value of left operand */ 1493 i64 iB; /* Integer value of right operand */ 1494 double rA; /* Real value of left operand */ 1495 double rB; /* Real value of right operand */ 1496 1497 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 1498 type1 = numericType(pIn1); 1499 pIn2 = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 1500 type2 = numericType(pIn2); 1501 pOut = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 1502 flags = pIn1->flags | pIn2->flags; 1503 if( (flags & MEM_Null)!=0 ) goto arithmetic_result_is_null; 1504 if( (type1 & type2 & MEM_Int)!=0 ){ 1505 iA = pIn1->u.i; 1506 iB = pIn2->u.i; 1507 bIntint = 1; 1508 switch( pOp->opcode ){ 1509 case OP_Add: if( sqlite3AddInt64(&iB,iA) ) goto fp_math; break; 1510 case OP_Subtract: if( sqlite3SubInt64(&iB,iA) ) goto fp_math; break; 1511 case OP_Multiply: if( sqlite3MulInt64(&iB,iA) ) goto fp_math; break; 1512 case OP_Divide: { 1513 if( iA==0 ) goto arithmetic_result_is_null; 1514 if( iA==-1 && iB==SMALLEST_INT64 ) goto fp_math; 1515 iB /= iA; 1516 break; 1517 } 1518 default: { 1519 if( iA==0 ) goto arithmetic_result_is_null; 1520 if( iA==-1 ) iA = 1; 1521 iB %= iA; 1522 break; 1523 } 1524 } 1525 pOut->u.i = iB; 1526 MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Int); 1527 }else{ 1528 bIntint = 0; 1529 fp_math: 1530 rA = sqlite3VdbeRealValue(pIn1); 1531 rB = sqlite3VdbeRealValue(pIn2); 1532 switch( pOp->opcode ){ 1533 case OP_Add: rB += rA; break; 1534 case OP_Subtract: rB -= rA; break; 1535 case OP_Multiply: rB *= rA; break; 1536 case OP_Divide: { 1537 /* (double)0 In case of SQLITE_OMIT_FLOATING_POINT... */ 1538 if( rA==(double)0 ) goto arithmetic_result_is_null; 1539 rB /= rA; 1540 break; 1541 } 1542 default: { 1543 iA = (i64)rA; 1544 iB = (i64)rB; 1545 if( iA==0 ) goto arithmetic_result_is_null; 1546 if( iA==-1 ) iA = 1; 1547 rB = (double)(iB % iA); 1548 break; 1549 } 1550 } 1551 #ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_FLOATING_POINT 1552 pOut->u.i = rB; 1553 MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Int); 1554 #else 1555 if( sqlite3IsNaN(rB) ){ 1556 goto arithmetic_result_is_null; 1557 } 1558 pOut->u.r = rB; 1559 MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Real); 1560 if( ((type1|type2)&MEM_Real)==0 && !bIntint ){ 1561 sqlite3VdbeIntegerAffinity(pOut); 1562 } 1563 #endif 1564 } 1565 break; 1566 1567 arithmetic_result_is_null: 1568 sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pOut); 1569 break; 1570 } 1571 1572 /* Opcode: CollSeq P1 * * P4 1573 ** 1574 ** P4 is a pointer to a CollSeq struct. If the next call to a user function 1575 ** or aggregate calls sqlite3GetFuncCollSeq(), this collation sequence will 1576 ** be returned. This is used by the built-in min(), max() and nullif() 1577 ** functions. 1578 ** 1579 ** If P1 is not zero, then it is a register that a subsequent min() or 1580 ** max() aggregate will set to 1 if the current row is not the minimum or 1581 ** maximum. The P1 register is initialized to 0 by this instruction. 1582 ** 1583 ** The interface used by the implementation of the aforementioned functions 1584 ** to retrieve the collation sequence set by this opcode is not available 1585 ** publicly. Only built-in functions have access to this feature. 1586 */ 1587 case OP_CollSeq: { 1588 assert( pOp->p4type==P4_COLLSEQ ); 1589 if( pOp->p1 ){ 1590 sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(&aMem[pOp->p1], 0); 1591 } 1592 break; 1593 } 1594 1595 /* Opcode: Function0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 1596 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=func(r[P2@P5]) 1597 ** 1598 ** Invoke a user function (P4 is a pointer to a FuncDef object that 1599 ** defines the function) with P5 arguments taken from register P2 and 1600 ** successors. The result of the function is stored in register P3. 1601 ** Register P3 must not be one of the function inputs. 1602 ** 1603 ** P1 is a 32-bit bitmask indicating whether or not each argument to the 1604 ** function was determined to be constant at compile time. If the first 1605 ** argument was constant then bit 0 of P1 is set. This is used to determine 1606 ** whether meta data associated with a user function argument using the 1607 ** sqlite3_set_auxdata() API may be safely retained until the next 1608 ** invocation of this opcode. 1609 ** 1610 ** See also: Function, AggStep, AggFinal 1611 */ 1612 /* Opcode: Function P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 1613 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=func(r[P2@P5]) 1614 ** 1615 ** Invoke a user function (P4 is a pointer to an sqlite3_context object that 1616 ** contains a pointer to the function to be run) with P5 arguments taken 1617 ** from register P2 and successors. The result of the function is stored 1618 ** in register P3. Register P3 must not be one of the function inputs. 1619 ** 1620 ** P1 is a 32-bit bitmask indicating whether or not each argument to the 1621 ** function was determined to be constant at compile time. If the first 1622 ** argument was constant then bit 0 of P1 is set. This is used to determine 1623 ** whether meta data associated with a user function argument using the 1624 ** sqlite3_set_auxdata() API may be safely retained until the next 1625 ** invocation of this opcode. 1626 ** 1627 ** SQL functions are initially coded as OP_Function0 with P4 pointing 1628 ** to a FuncDef object. But on first evaluation, the P4 operand is 1629 ** automatically converted into an sqlite3_context object and the operation 1630 ** changed to this OP_Function opcode. In this way, the initialization of 1631 ** the sqlite3_context object occurs only once, rather than once for each 1632 ** evaluation of the function. 1633 ** 1634 ** See also: Function0, AggStep, AggFinal 1635 */ 1636 case OP_Function0: { 1637 int n; 1638 sqlite3_context *pCtx; 1639 1640 assert( pOp->p4type==P4_FUNCDEF ); 1641 n = pOp->p5; 1642 assert( pOp->p3>0 && pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); 1643 assert( n==0 || (pOp->p2>0 && pOp->p2+n<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)+1) ); 1644 assert( pOp->p3<pOp->p2 || pOp->p3>=pOp->p2+n ); 1645 pCtx = sqlite3DbMallocRawNN(db, sizeof(*pCtx) + (n-1)*sizeof(sqlite3_value*)); 1646 if( pCtx==0 ) goto no_mem; 1647 pCtx->pOut = 0; 1648 pCtx->pFunc = pOp->p4.pFunc; 1649 pCtx->iOp = (int)(pOp - aOp); 1650 pCtx->pVdbe = p; 1651 pCtx->argc = n; 1652 pOp->p4type = P4_FUNCCTX; 1653 pOp->p4.pCtx = pCtx; 1654 pOp->opcode = OP_Function; 1655 /* Fall through into OP_Function */ 1656 } 1657 case OP_Function: { 1658 int i; 1659 sqlite3_context *pCtx; 1660 1661 assert( pOp->p4type==P4_FUNCCTX ); 1662 pCtx = pOp->p4.pCtx; 1663 1664 /* If this function is inside of a trigger, the register array in aMem[] 1665 ** might change from one evaluation to the next. The next block of code 1666 ** checks to see if the register array has changed, and if so it 1667 ** reinitializes the relavant parts of the sqlite3_context object */ 1668 pOut = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 1669 if( pCtx->pOut != pOut ){ 1670 pCtx->pOut = pOut; 1671 for(i=pCtx->argc-1; i>=0; i--) pCtx->argv[i] = &aMem[pOp->p2+i]; 1672 } 1673 1674 memAboutToChange(p, pCtx->pOut); 1675 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 1676 for(i=0; i<pCtx->argc; i++){ 1677 assert( memIsValid(pCtx->argv[i]) ); 1678 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p2+i, pCtx->argv[i]); 1679 } 1680 #endif 1681 MemSetTypeFlag(pCtx->pOut, MEM_Null); 1682 pCtx->fErrorOrAux = 0; 1683 db->lastRowid = lastRowid; 1684 (*pCtx->pFunc->xSFunc)(pCtx, pCtx->argc, pCtx->argv);/* IMP: R-24505-23230 */ 1685 lastRowid = db->lastRowid; /* Remember rowid changes made by xSFunc */ 1686 1687 /* If the function returned an error, throw an exception */ 1688 if( pCtx->fErrorOrAux ){ 1689 if( pCtx->isError ){ 1690 sqlite3VdbeError(p, "%s", sqlite3_value_text(pCtx->pOut)); 1691 rc = pCtx->isError; 1692 } 1693 sqlite3VdbeDeleteAuxData(db, &p->pAuxData, pCtx->iOp, pOp->p1); 1694 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 1695 } 1696 1697 /* Copy the result of the function into register P3 */ 1698 if( pOut->flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Blob) ){ 1699 sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(pCtx->pOut, encoding); 1700 if( sqlite3VdbeMemTooBig(pCtx->pOut) ) goto too_big; 1701 } 1702 1703 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, pCtx->pOut); 1704 UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pCtx->pOut); 1705 break; 1706 } 1707 1708 /* Opcode: BitAnd P1 P2 P3 * * 1709 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P1]&r[P2] 1710 ** 1711 ** Take the bit-wise AND of the values in register P1 and P2 and 1712 ** store the result in register P3. 1713 ** If either input is NULL, the result is NULL. 1714 */ 1715 /* Opcode: BitOr P1 P2 P3 * * 1716 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P1]|r[P2] 1717 ** 1718 ** Take the bit-wise OR of the values in register P1 and P2 and 1719 ** store the result in register P3. 1720 ** If either input is NULL, the result is NULL. 1721 */ 1722 /* Opcode: ShiftLeft P1 P2 P3 * * 1723 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]<<r[P1] 1724 ** 1725 ** Shift the integer value in register P2 to the left by the 1726 ** number of bits specified by the integer in register P1. 1727 ** Store the result in register P3. 1728 ** If either input is NULL, the result is NULL. 1729 */ 1730 /* Opcode: ShiftRight P1 P2 P3 * * 1731 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]>>r[P1] 1732 ** 1733 ** Shift the integer value in register P2 to the right by the 1734 ** number of bits specified by the integer in register P1. 1735 ** Store the result in register P3. 1736 ** If either input is NULL, the result is NULL. 1737 */ 1738 case OP_BitAnd: /* same as TK_BITAND, in1, in2, out3 */ 1739 case OP_BitOr: /* same as TK_BITOR, in1, in2, out3 */ 1740 case OP_ShiftLeft: /* same as TK_LSHIFT, in1, in2, out3 */ 1741 case OP_ShiftRight: { /* same as TK_RSHIFT, in1, in2, out3 */ 1742 i64 iA; 1743 u64 uA; 1744 i64 iB; 1745 u8 op; 1746 1747 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 1748 pIn2 = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 1749 pOut = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 1750 if( (pIn1->flags | pIn2->flags) & MEM_Null ){ 1751 sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pOut); 1752 break; 1753 } 1754 iA = sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pIn2); 1755 iB = sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pIn1); 1756 op = pOp->opcode; 1757 if( op==OP_BitAnd ){ 1758 iA &= iB; 1759 }else if( op==OP_BitOr ){ 1760 iA |= iB; 1761 }else if( iB!=0 ){ 1762 assert( op==OP_ShiftRight || op==OP_ShiftLeft ); 1763 1764 /* If shifting by a negative amount, shift in the other direction */ 1765 if( iB<0 ){ 1766 assert( OP_ShiftRight==OP_ShiftLeft+1 ); 1767 op = 2*OP_ShiftLeft + 1 - op; 1768 iB = iB>(-64) ? -iB : 64; 1769 } 1770 1771 if( iB>=64 ){ 1772 iA = (iA>=0 || op==OP_ShiftLeft) ? 0 : -1; 1773 }else{ 1774 memcpy(&uA, &iA, sizeof(uA)); 1775 if( op==OP_ShiftLeft ){ 1776 uA <<= iB; 1777 }else{ 1778 uA >>= iB; 1779 /* Sign-extend on a right shift of a negative number */ 1780 if( iA<0 ) uA |= ((((u64)0xffffffff)<<32)|0xffffffff) << (64-iB); 1781 } 1782 memcpy(&iA, &uA, sizeof(iA)); 1783 } 1784 } 1785 pOut->u.i = iA; 1786 MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Int); 1787 break; 1788 } 1789 1790 /* Opcode: AddImm P1 P2 * * * 1791 ** Synopsis: r[P1]=r[P1]+P2 1792 ** 1793 ** Add the constant P2 to the value in register P1. 1794 ** The result is always an integer. 1795 ** 1796 ** To force any register to be an integer, just add 0. 1797 */ 1798 case OP_AddImm: { /* in1 */ 1799 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 1800 memAboutToChange(p, pIn1); 1801 sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pIn1); 1802 pIn1->u.i += pOp->p2; 1803 break; 1804 } 1805 1806 /* Opcode: MustBeInt P1 P2 * * * 1807 ** 1808 ** Force the value in register P1 to be an integer. If the value 1809 ** in P1 is not an integer and cannot be converted into an integer 1810 ** without data loss, then jump immediately to P2, or if P2==0 1811 ** raise an SQLITE_MISMATCH exception. 1812 */ 1813 case OP_MustBeInt: { /* jump, in1 */ 1814 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 1815 if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Int)==0 ){ 1816 applyAffinity(pIn1, SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC, encoding); 1817 VdbeBranchTaken((pIn1->flags&MEM_Int)==0, 2); 1818 if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Int)==0 ){ 1819 if( pOp->p2==0 ){ 1820 rc = SQLITE_MISMATCH; 1821 goto abort_due_to_error; 1822 }else{ 1823 goto jump_to_p2; 1824 } 1825 } 1826 } 1827 MemSetTypeFlag(pIn1, MEM_Int); 1828 break; 1829 } 1830 1831 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FLOATING_POINT 1832 /* Opcode: RealAffinity P1 * * * * 1833 ** 1834 ** If register P1 holds an integer convert it to a real value. 1835 ** 1836 ** This opcode is used when extracting information from a column that 1837 ** has REAL affinity. Such column values may still be stored as 1838 ** integers, for space efficiency, but after extraction we want them 1839 ** to have only a real value. 1840 */ 1841 case OP_RealAffinity: { /* in1 */ 1842 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 1843 if( pIn1->flags & MEM_Int ){ 1844 sqlite3VdbeMemRealify(pIn1); 1845 } 1846 break; 1847 } 1848 #endif 1849 1850 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_CAST 1851 /* Opcode: Cast P1 P2 * * * 1852 ** Synopsis: affinity(r[P1]) 1853 ** 1854 ** Force the value in register P1 to be the type defined by P2. 1855 ** 1856 ** <ul> 1857 ** <li value="97"> TEXT 1858 ** <li value="98"> BLOB 1859 ** <li value="99"> NUMERIC 1860 ** <li value="100"> INTEGER 1861 ** <li value="101"> REAL 1862 ** </ul> 1863 ** 1864 ** A NULL value is not changed by this routine. It remains NULL. 1865 */ 1866 case OP_Cast: { /* in1 */ 1867 assert( pOp->p2>=SQLITE_AFF_BLOB && pOp->p2<=SQLITE_AFF_REAL ); 1868 testcase( pOp->p2==SQLITE_AFF_TEXT ); 1869 testcase( pOp->p2==SQLITE_AFF_BLOB ); 1870 testcase( pOp->p2==SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC ); 1871 testcase( pOp->p2==SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER ); 1872 testcase( pOp->p2==SQLITE_AFF_REAL ); 1873 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 1874 memAboutToChange(p, pIn1); 1875 rc = ExpandBlob(pIn1); 1876 sqlite3VdbeMemCast(pIn1, pOp->p2, encoding); 1877 UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pIn1); 1878 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 1879 break; 1880 } 1881 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_CAST */ 1882 1883 /* Opcode: Lt P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 1884 ** Synopsis: if r[P1]<r[P3] goto P2 1885 ** 1886 ** Compare the values in register P1 and P3. If reg(P3)<reg(P1) then 1887 ** jump to address P2. 1888 ** 1889 ** If the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL bit of P5 is set and either reg(P1) or 1890 ** reg(P3) is NULL then take the jump. If the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL 1891 ** bit is clear then fall through if either operand is NULL. 1892 ** 1893 ** The SQLITE_AFF_MASK portion of P5 must be an affinity character - 1894 ** SQLITE_AFF_TEXT, SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER, and so forth. An attempt is made 1895 ** to coerce both inputs according to this affinity before the 1896 ** comparison is made. If the SQLITE_AFF_MASK is 0x00, then numeric 1897 ** affinity is used. Note that the affinity conversions are stored 1898 ** back into the input registers P1 and P3. So this opcode can cause 1899 ** persistent changes to registers P1 and P3. 1900 ** 1901 ** Once any conversions have taken place, and neither value is NULL, 1902 ** the values are compared. If both values are blobs then memcmp() is 1903 ** used to determine the results of the comparison. If both values 1904 ** are text, then the appropriate collating function specified in 1905 ** P4 is used to do the comparison. If P4 is not specified then 1906 ** memcmp() is used to compare text string. If both values are 1907 ** numeric, then a numeric comparison is used. If the two values 1908 ** are of different types, then numbers are considered less than 1909 ** strings and strings are considered less than blobs. 1910 ** 1911 ** If the SQLITE_STOREP2 bit of P5 is set, then do not jump. Instead, 1912 ** store a boolean result (either 0, or 1, or NULL) in register P2. 1913 ** 1914 ** If the SQLITE_NULLEQ bit is set in P5, then NULL values are considered 1915 ** equal to one another, provided that they do not have their MEM_Cleared 1916 ** bit set. 1917 */ 1918 /* Opcode: Ne P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 1919 ** Synopsis: if r[P1]!=r[P3] goto P2 1920 ** 1921 ** This works just like the Lt opcode except that the jump is taken if 1922 ** the operands in registers P1 and P3 are not equal. See the Lt opcode for 1923 ** additional information. 1924 ** 1925 ** If SQLITE_NULLEQ is set in P5 then the result of comparison is always either 1926 ** true or false and is never NULL. If both operands are NULL then the result 1927 ** of comparison is false. If either operand is NULL then the result is true. 1928 ** If neither operand is NULL the result is the same as it would be if 1929 ** the SQLITE_NULLEQ flag were omitted from P5. 1930 */ 1931 /* Opcode: Eq P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 1932 ** Synopsis: if r[P1]==r[P3] goto P2 1933 ** 1934 ** This works just like the Lt opcode except that the jump is taken if 1935 ** the operands in registers P1 and P3 are equal. 1936 ** See the Lt opcode for additional information. 1937 ** 1938 ** If SQLITE_NULLEQ is set in P5 then the result of comparison is always either 1939 ** true or false and is never NULL. If both operands are NULL then the result 1940 ** of comparison is true. If either operand is NULL then the result is false. 1941 ** If neither operand is NULL the result is the same as it would be if 1942 ** the SQLITE_NULLEQ flag were omitted from P5. 1943 */ 1944 /* Opcode: Le P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 1945 ** Synopsis: if r[P1]<=r[P3] goto P2 1946 ** 1947 ** This works just like the Lt opcode except that the jump is taken if 1948 ** the content of register P3 is less than or equal to the content of 1949 ** register P1. See the Lt opcode for additional information. 1950 */ 1951 /* Opcode: Gt P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 1952 ** Synopsis: if r[P1]>r[P3] goto P2 1953 ** 1954 ** This works just like the Lt opcode except that the jump is taken if 1955 ** the content of register P3 is greater than the content of 1956 ** register P1. See the Lt opcode for additional information. 1957 */ 1958 /* Opcode: Ge P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 1959 ** Synopsis: if r[P1]>=r[P3] goto P2 1960 ** 1961 ** This works just like the Lt opcode except that the jump is taken if 1962 ** the content of register P3 is greater than or equal to the content of 1963 ** register P1. See the Lt opcode for additional information. 1964 */ 1965 case OP_Eq: /* same as TK_EQ, jump, in1, in3 */ 1966 case OP_Ne: /* same as TK_NE, jump, in1, in3 */ 1967 case OP_Lt: /* same as TK_LT, jump, in1, in3 */ 1968 case OP_Le: /* same as TK_LE, jump, in1, in3 */ 1969 case OP_Gt: /* same as TK_GT, jump, in1, in3 */ 1970 case OP_Ge: { /* same as TK_GE, jump, in1, in3 */ 1971 int res; /* Result of the comparison of pIn1 against pIn3 */ 1972 char affinity; /* Affinity to use for comparison */ 1973 u16 flags1; /* Copy of initial value of pIn1->flags */ 1974 u16 flags3; /* Copy of initial value of pIn3->flags */ 1975 1976 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 1977 pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 1978 flags1 = pIn1->flags; 1979 flags3 = pIn3->flags; 1980 if( (flags1 | flags3)&MEM_Null ){ 1981 /* One or both operands are NULL */ 1982 if( pOp->p5 & SQLITE_NULLEQ ){ 1983 /* If SQLITE_NULLEQ is set (which will only happen if the operator is 1984 ** OP_Eq or OP_Ne) then take the jump or not depending on whether 1985 ** or not both operands are null. 1986 */ 1987 assert( pOp->opcode==OP_Eq || pOp->opcode==OP_Ne ); 1988 assert( (flags1 & MEM_Cleared)==0 ); 1989 assert( (pOp->p5 & SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL)==0 ); 1990 if( (flags1&MEM_Null)!=0 1991 && (flags3&MEM_Null)!=0 1992 && (flags3&MEM_Cleared)==0 1993 ){ 1994 res = 0; /* Results are equal */ 1995 }else{ 1996 res = 1; /* Results are not equal */ 1997 } 1998 }else{ 1999 /* SQLITE_NULLEQ is clear and at least one operand is NULL, 2000 ** then the result is always NULL. 2001 ** The jump is taken if the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL bit is set. 2002 */ 2003 if( pOp->p5 & SQLITE_STOREP2 ){ 2004 pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 2005 memAboutToChange(p, pOut); 2006 MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Null); 2007 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p2, pOut); 2008 }else{ 2009 VdbeBranchTaken(2,3); 2010 if( pOp->p5 & SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL ){ 2011 goto jump_to_p2; 2012 } 2013 } 2014 break; 2015 } 2016 }else{ 2017 /* Neither operand is NULL. Do a comparison. */ 2018 affinity = pOp->p5 & SQLITE_AFF_MASK; 2019 if( affinity>=SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC ){ 2020 if( (flags1 | flags3)&MEM_Str ){ 2021 if( (flags1 & (MEM_Int|MEM_Real|MEM_Str))==MEM_Str ){ 2022 applyNumericAffinity(pIn1,0); 2023 flags3 = pIn3->flags; 2024 } 2025 if( (flags3 & (MEM_Int|MEM_Real|MEM_Str))==MEM_Str ){ 2026 applyNumericAffinity(pIn3,0); 2027 } 2028 } 2029 }else if( affinity==SQLITE_AFF_TEXT ){ 2030 if( (flags1 & MEM_Str)==0 && (flags1 & (MEM_Int|MEM_Real))!=0 ){ 2031 testcase( pIn1->flags & MEM_Int ); 2032 testcase( pIn1->flags & MEM_Real ); 2033 sqlite3VdbeMemStringify(pIn1, encoding, 1); 2034 testcase( (flags1&MEM_Dyn) != (pIn1->flags&MEM_Dyn) ); 2035 flags1 = (pIn1->flags & ~MEM_TypeMask) | (flags1 & MEM_TypeMask); 2036 flags3 = pIn3->flags; 2037 } 2038 if( (flags3 & MEM_Str)==0 && (flags3 & (MEM_Int|MEM_Real))!=0 ){ 2039 testcase( pIn3->flags & MEM_Int ); 2040 testcase( pIn3->flags & MEM_Real ); 2041 sqlite3VdbeMemStringify(pIn3, encoding, 1); 2042 testcase( (flags3&MEM_Dyn) != (pIn3->flags&MEM_Dyn) ); 2043 flags3 = (pIn3->flags & ~MEM_TypeMask) | (flags3 & MEM_TypeMask); 2044 } 2045 } 2046 assert( pOp->p4type==P4_COLLSEQ || pOp->p4.pColl==0 ); 2047 if( flags1 & MEM_Zero ){ 2048 sqlite3VdbeMemExpandBlob(pIn1); 2049 flags1 &= ~MEM_Zero; 2050 } 2051 if( flags3 & MEM_Zero ){ 2052 sqlite3VdbeMemExpandBlob(pIn3); 2053 flags3 &= ~MEM_Zero; 2054 } 2055 res = sqlite3MemCompare(pIn3, pIn1, pOp->p4.pColl); 2056 } 2057 switch( pOp->opcode ){ 2058 case OP_Eq: res = res==0; break; 2059 case OP_Ne: res = res!=0; break; 2060 case OP_Lt: res = res<0; break; 2061 case OP_Le: res = res<=0; break; 2062 case OP_Gt: res = res>0; break; 2063 default: res = res>=0; break; 2064 } 2065 2066 /* Undo any changes made by applyAffinity() to the input registers. */ 2067 assert( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Dyn) == (flags1 & MEM_Dyn) ); 2068 pIn1->flags = flags1; 2069 assert( (pIn3->flags & MEM_Dyn) == (flags3 & MEM_Dyn) ); 2070 pIn3->flags = flags3; 2071 2072 if( pOp->p5 & SQLITE_STOREP2 ){ 2073 pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 2074 memAboutToChange(p, pOut); 2075 MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Int); 2076 pOut->u.i = res; 2077 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p2, pOut); 2078 }else{ 2079 VdbeBranchTaken(res!=0, (pOp->p5 & SQLITE_NULLEQ)?2:3); 2080 if( res ){ 2081 goto jump_to_p2; 2082 } 2083 } 2084 break; 2085 } 2086 2087 /* Opcode: Permutation * * * P4 * 2088 ** 2089 ** Set the permutation used by the OP_Compare operator to be the array 2090 ** of integers in P4. 2091 ** 2092 ** The permutation is only valid until the next OP_Compare that has 2093 ** the OPFLAG_PERMUTE bit set in P5. Typically the OP_Permutation should 2094 ** occur immediately prior to the OP_Compare. 2095 ** 2096 ** The first integer in the P4 integer array is the length of the array 2097 ** and does not become part of the permutation. 2098 */ 2099 case OP_Permutation: { 2100 assert( pOp->p4type==P4_INTARRAY ); 2101 assert( pOp->p4.ai ); 2102 aPermute = pOp->p4.ai + 1; 2103 break; 2104 } 2105 2106 /* Opcode: Compare P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 2107 ** Synopsis: r[P1@P3] <-> r[P2@P3] 2108 ** 2109 ** Compare two vectors of registers in reg(P1)..reg(P1+P3-1) (call this 2110 ** vector "A") and in reg(P2)..reg(P2+P3-1) ("B"). Save the result of 2111 ** the comparison for use by the next OP_Jump instruct. 2112 ** 2113 ** If P5 has the OPFLAG_PERMUTE bit set, then the order of comparison is 2114 ** determined by the most recent OP_Permutation operator. If the 2115 ** OPFLAG_PERMUTE bit is clear, then register are compared in sequential 2116 ** order. 2117 ** 2118 ** P4 is a KeyInfo structure that defines collating sequences and sort 2119 ** orders for the comparison. The permutation applies to registers 2120 ** only. The KeyInfo elements are used sequentially. 2121 ** 2122 ** The comparison is a sort comparison, so NULLs compare equal, 2123 ** NULLs are less than numbers, numbers are less than strings, 2124 ** and strings are less than blobs. 2125 */ 2126 case OP_Compare: { 2127 int n; 2128 int i; 2129 int p1; 2130 int p2; 2131 const KeyInfo *pKeyInfo; 2132 int idx; 2133 CollSeq *pColl; /* Collating sequence to use on this term */ 2134 int bRev; /* True for DESCENDING sort order */ 2135 2136 if( (pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_PERMUTE)==0 ) aPermute = 0; 2137 n = pOp->p3; 2138 pKeyInfo = pOp->p4.pKeyInfo; 2139 assert( n>0 ); 2140 assert( pKeyInfo!=0 ); 2141 p1 = pOp->p1; 2142 p2 = pOp->p2; 2143 #if SQLITE_DEBUG 2144 if( aPermute ){ 2145 int k, mx = 0; 2146 for(k=0; k<n; k++) if( aPermute[k]>mx ) mx = aPermute[k]; 2147 assert( p1>0 && p1+mx<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)+1 ); 2148 assert( p2>0 && p2+mx<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)+1 ); 2149 }else{ 2150 assert( p1>0 && p1+n<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)+1 ); 2151 assert( p2>0 && p2+n<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)+1 ); 2152 } 2153 #endif /* SQLITE_DEBUG */ 2154 for(i=0; i<n; i++){ 2155 idx = aPermute ? aPermute[i] : i; 2156 assert( memIsValid(&aMem[p1+idx]) ); 2157 assert( memIsValid(&aMem[p2+idx]) ); 2158 REGISTER_TRACE(p1+idx, &aMem[p1+idx]); 2159 REGISTER_TRACE(p2+idx, &aMem[p2+idx]); 2160 assert( i<pKeyInfo->nField ); 2161 pColl = pKeyInfo->aColl[i]; 2162 bRev = pKeyInfo->aSortOrder[i]; 2163 iCompare = sqlite3MemCompare(&aMem[p1+idx], &aMem[p2+idx], pColl); 2164 if( iCompare ){ 2165 if( bRev ) iCompare = -iCompare; 2166 break; 2167 } 2168 } 2169 aPermute = 0; 2170 break; 2171 } 2172 2173 /* Opcode: Jump P1 P2 P3 * * 2174 ** 2175 ** Jump to the instruction at address P1, P2, or P3 depending on whether 2176 ** in the most recent OP_Compare instruction the P1 vector was less than 2177 ** equal to, or greater than the P2 vector, respectively. 2178 */ 2179 case OP_Jump: { /* jump */ 2180 if( iCompare<0 ){ 2181 VdbeBranchTaken(0,3); pOp = &aOp[pOp->p1 - 1]; 2182 }else if( iCompare==0 ){ 2183 VdbeBranchTaken(1,3); pOp = &aOp[pOp->p2 - 1]; 2184 }else{ 2185 VdbeBranchTaken(2,3); pOp = &aOp[pOp->p3 - 1]; 2186 } 2187 break; 2188 } 2189 2190 /* Opcode: And P1 P2 P3 * * 2191 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=(r[P1] && r[P2]) 2192 ** 2193 ** Take the logical AND of the values in registers P1 and P2 and 2194 ** write the result into register P3. 2195 ** 2196 ** If either P1 or P2 is 0 (false) then the result is 0 even if 2197 ** the other input is NULL. A NULL and true or two NULLs give 2198 ** a NULL output. 2199 */ 2200 /* Opcode: Or P1 P2 P3 * * 2201 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=(r[P1] || r[P2]) 2202 ** 2203 ** Take the logical OR of the values in register P1 and P2 and 2204 ** store the answer in register P3. 2205 ** 2206 ** If either P1 or P2 is nonzero (true) then the result is 1 (true) 2207 ** even if the other input is NULL. A NULL and false or two NULLs 2208 ** give a NULL output. 2209 */ 2210 case OP_And: /* same as TK_AND, in1, in2, out3 */ 2211 case OP_Or: { /* same as TK_OR, in1, in2, out3 */ 2212 int v1; /* Left operand: 0==FALSE, 1==TRUE, 2==UNKNOWN or NULL */ 2213 int v2; /* Right operand: 0==FALSE, 1==TRUE, 2==UNKNOWN or NULL */ 2214 2215 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 2216 if( pIn1->flags & MEM_Null ){ 2217 v1 = 2; 2218 }else{ 2219 v1 = sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pIn1)!=0; 2220 } 2221 pIn2 = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 2222 if( pIn2->flags & MEM_Null ){ 2223 v2 = 2; 2224 }else{ 2225 v2 = sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pIn2)!=0; 2226 } 2227 if( pOp->opcode==OP_And ){ 2228 static const unsigned char and_logic[] = { 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 2, 0, 2, 2 }; 2229 v1 = and_logic[v1*3+v2]; 2230 }else{ 2231 static const unsigned char or_logic[] = { 0, 1, 2, 1, 1, 1, 2, 1, 2 }; 2232 v1 = or_logic[v1*3+v2]; 2233 } 2234 pOut = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 2235 if( v1==2 ){ 2236 MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Null); 2237 }else{ 2238 pOut->u.i = v1; 2239 MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Int); 2240 } 2241 break; 2242 } 2243 2244 /* Opcode: Not P1 P2 * * * 2245 ** Synopsis: r[P2]= !r[P1] 2246 ** 2247 ** Interpret the value in register P1 as a boolean value. Store the 2248 ** boolean complement in register P2. If the value in register P1 is 2249 ** NULL, then a NULL is stored in P2. 2250 */ 2251 case OP_Not: { /* same as TK_NOT, in1, out2 */ 2252 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 2253 pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 2254 sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pOut); 2255 if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Null)==0 ){ 2256 pOut->flags = MEM_Int; 2257 pOut->u.i = !sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pIn1); 2258 } 2259 break; 2260 } 2261 2262 /* Opcode: BitNot P1 P2 * * * 2263 ** Synopsis: r[P1]= ~r[P1] 2264 ** 2265 ** Interpret the content of register P1 as an integer. Store the 2266 ** ones-complement of the P1 value into register P2. If P1 holds 2267 ** a NULL then store a NULL in P2. 2268 */ 2269 case OP_BitNot: { /* same as TK_BITNOT, in1, out2 */ 2270 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 2271 pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 2272 sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pOut); 2273 if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Null)==0 ){ 2274 pOut->flags = MEM_Int; 2275 pOut->u.i = ~sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pIn1); 2276 } 2277 break; 2278 } 2279 2280 /* Opcode: Once P1 P2 * * * 2281 ** 2282 ** Check the "once" flag number P1. If it is set, jump to instruction P2. 2283 ** Otherwise, set the flag and fall through to the next instruction. 2284 ** In other words, this opcode causes all following opcodes up through P2 2285 ** (but not including P2) to run just once and to be skipped on subsequent 2286 ** times through the loop. 2287 ** 2288 ** All "once" flags are initially cleared whenever a prepared statement 2289 ** first begins to run. 2290 */ 2291 case OP_Once: { /* jump */ 2292 assert( pOp->p1<p->nOnceFlag ); 2293 VdbeBranchTaken(p->aOnceFlag[pOp->p1]!=0, 2); 2294 if( p->aOnceFlag[pOp->p1] ){ 2295 goto jump_to_p2; 2296 }else{ 2297 p->aOnceFlag[pOp->p1] = 1; 2298 } 2299 break; 2300 } 2301 2302 /* Opcode: If P1 P2 P3 * * 2303 ** 2304 ** Jump to P2 if the value in register P1 is true. The value 2305 ** is considered true if it is numeric and non-zero. If the value 2306 ** in P1 is NULL then take the jump if and only if P3 is non-zero. 2307 */ 2308 /* Opcode: IfNot P1 P2 P3 * * 2309 ** 2310 ** Jump to P2 if the value in register P1 is False. The value 2311 ** is considered false if it has a numeric value of zero. If the value 2312 ** in P1 is NULL then take the jump if and only if P3 is non-zero. 2313 */ 2314 case OP_If: /* jump, in1 */ 2315 case OP_IfNot: { /* jump, in1 */ 2316 int c; 2317 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 2318 if( pIn1->flags & MEM_Null ){ 2319 c = pOp->p3; 2320 }else{ 2321 #ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_FLOATING_POINT 2322 c = sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pIn1)!=0; 2323 #else 2324 c = sqlite3VdbeRealValue(pIn1)!=0.0; 2325 #endif 2326 if( pOp->opcode==OP_IfNot ) c = !c; 2327 } 2328 VdbeBranchTaken(c!=0, 2); 2329 if( c ){ 2330 goto jump_to_p2; 2331 } 2332 break; 2333 } 2334 2335 /* Opcode: IsNull P1 P2 * * * 2336 ** Synopsis: if r[P1]==NULL goto P2 2337 ** 2338 ** Jump to P2 if the value in register P1 is NULL. 2339 */ 2340 case OP_IsNull: { /* same as TK_ISNULL, jump, in1 */ 2341 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 2342 VdbeBranchTaken( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Null)!=0, 2); 2343 if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Null)!=0 ){ 2344 goto jump_to_p2; 2345 } 2346 break; 2347 } 2348 2349 /* Opcode: NotNull P1 P2 * * * 2350 ** Synopsis: if r[P1]!=NULL goto P2 2351 ** 2352 ** Jump to P2 if the value in register P1 is not NULL. 2353 */ 2354 case OP_NotNull: { /* same as TK_NOTNULL, jump, in1 */ 2355 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 2356 VdbeBranchTaken( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Null)==0, 2); 2357 if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Null)==0 ){ 2358 goto jump_to_p2; 2359 } 2360 break; 2361 } 2362 2363 /* Opcode: Column P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 2364 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=PX 2365 ** 2366 ** Interpret the data that cursor P1 points to as a structure built using 2367 ** the MakeRecord instruction. (See the MakeRecord opcode for additional 2368 ** information about the format of the data.) Extract the P2-th column 2369 ** from this record. If there are less that (P2+1) 2370 ** values in the record, extract a NULL. 2371 ** 2372 ** The value extracted is stored in register P3. 2373 ** 2374 ** If the column contains fewer than P2 fields, then extract a NULL. Or, 2375 ** if the P4 argument is a P4_MEM use the value of the P4 argument as 2376 ** the result. 2377 ** 2378 ** If the OPFLAG_CLEARCACHE bit is set on P5 and P1 is a pseudo-table cursor, 2379 ** then the cache of the cursor is reset prior to extracting the column. 2380 ** The first OP_Column against a pseudo-table after the value of the content 2381 ** register has changed should have this bit set. 2382 ** 2383 ** If the OPFLAG_LENGTHARG and OPFLAG_TYPEOFARG bits are set on P5 when 2384 ** the result is guaranteed to only be used as the argument of a length() 2385 ** or typeof() function, respectively. The loading of large blobs can be 2386 ** skipped for length() and all content loading can be skipped for typeof(). 2387 */ 2388 case OP_Column: { 2389 int p2; /* column number to retrieve */ 2390 VdbeCursor *pC; /* The VDBE cursor */ 2391 BtCursor *pCrsr; /* The BTree cursor */ 2392 u32 *aOffset; /* aOffset[i] is offset to start of data for i-th column */ 2393 int len; /* The length of the serialized data for the column */ 2394 int i; /* Loop counter */ 2395 Mem *pDest; /* Where to write the extracted value */ 2396 Mem sMem; /* For storing the record being decoded */ 2397 const u8 *zData; /* Part of the record being decoded */ 2398 const u8 *zHdr; /* Next unparsed byte of the header */ 2399 const u8 *zEndHdr; /* Pointer to first byte after the header */ 2400 u32 offset; /* Offset into the data */ 2401 u64 offset64; /* 64-bit offset */ 2402 u32 avail; /* Number of bytes of available data */ 2403 u32 t; /* A type code from the record header */ 2404 Mem *pReg; /* PseudoTable input register */ 2405 2406 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 2407 p2 = pOp->p2; 2408 2409 /* If the cursor cache is stale, bring it up-to-date */ 2410 rc = sqlite3VdbeCursorMoveto(&pC, &p2); 2411 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 2412 2413 assert( pOp->p3>0 && pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); 2414 pDest = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 2415 memAboutToChange(p, pDest); 2416 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 2417 assert( pC!=0 ); 2418 assert( p2<pC->nField ); 2419 aOffset = pC->aOffset; 2420 assert( pC->eCurType!=CURTYPE_VTAB ); 2421 assert( pC->eCurType!=CURTYPE_PSEUDO || pC->nullRow ); 2422 assert( pC->eCurType!=CURTYPE_SORTER ); 2423 pCrsr = pC->uc.pCursor; 2424 2425 if( pC->cacheStatus!=p->cacheCtr ){ /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-FALSE*/ 2426 if( pC->nullRow ){ 2427 if( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_PSEUDO ){ 2428 assert( pC->uc.pseudoTableReg>0 ); 2429 pReg = &aMem[pC->uc.pseudoTableReg]; 2430 assert( pReg->flags & MEM_Blob ); 2431 assert( memIsValid(pReg) ); 2432 pC->payloadSize = pC->szRow = avail = pReg->n; 2433 pC->aRow = (u8*)pReg->z; 2434 }else{ 2435 sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pDest); 2436 goto op_column_out; 2437 } 2438 }else{ 2439 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 2440 assert( pCrsr ); 2441 assert( sqlite3BtreeCursorIsValid(pCrsr) ); 2442 pC->payloadSize = sqlite3BtreePayloadSize(pCrsr); 2443 pC->aRow = sqlite3BtreePayloadFetch(pCrsr, &avail); 2444 assert( avail<=65536 ); /* Maximum page size is 64KiB */ 2445 if( pC->payloadSize <= (u32)avail ){ 2446 pC->szRow = pC->payloadSize; 2447 }else if( pC->payloadSize > (u32)db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_LENGTH] ){ 2448 goto too_big; 2449 }else{ 2450 pC->szRow = avail; 2451 } 2452 } 2453 pC->cacheStatus = p->cacheCtr; 2454 pC->iHdrOffset = getVarint32(pC->aRow, offset); 2455 pC->nHdrParsed = 0; 2456 aOffset[0] = offset; 2457 2458 2459 if( avail<offset ){ /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-FALSE*/ 2460 /* pC->aRow does not have to hold the entire row, but it does at least 2461 ** need to cover the header of the record. If pC->aRow does not contain 2462 ** the complete header, then set it to zero, forcing the header to be 2463 ** dynamically allocated. */ 2464 pC->aRow = 0; 2465 pC->szRow = 0; 2466 2467 /* Make sure a corrupt database has not given us an oversize header. 2468 ** Do this now to avoid an oversize memory allocation. 2469 ** 2470 ** Type entries can be between 1 and 5 bytes each. But 4 and 5 byte 2471 ** types use so much data space that there can only be 4096 and 32 of 2472 ** them, respectively. So the maximum header length results from a 2473 ** 3-byte type for each of the maximum of 32768 columns plus three 2474 ** extra bytes for the header length itself. 32768*3 + 3 = 98307. 2475 */ 2476 if( offset > 98307 || offset > pC->payloadSize ){ 2477 rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; 2478 goto abort_due_to_error; 2479 } 2480 }else if( offset>0 ){ /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-TRUE*/ 2481 /* The following goto is an optimization. It can be omitted and 2482 ** everything will still work. But OP_Column is measurably faster 2483 ** by skipping the subsequent conditional, which is always true. 2484 */ 2485 zData = pC->aRow; 2486 assert( pC->nHdrParsed<=p2 ); /* Conditional skipped */ 2487 goto op_column_read_header; 2488 } 2489 } 2490 2491 /* Make sure at least the first p2+1 entries of the header have been 2492 ** parsed and valid information is in aOffset[] and pC->aType[]. 2493 */ 2494 if( pC->nHdrParsed<=p2 ){ 2495 /* If there is more header available for parsing in the record, try 2496 ** to extract additional fields up through the p2+1-th field 2497 */ 2498 if( pC->iHdrOffset<aOffset[0] ){ 2499 /* Make sure zData points to enough of the record to cover the header. */ 2500 if( pC->aRow==0 ){ 2501 memset(&sMem, 0, sizeof(sMem)); 2502 rc = sqlite3VdbeMemFromBtree(pCrsr, 0, aOffset[0], !pC->isTable, &sMem); 2503 if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto abort_due_to_error; 2504 zData = (u8*)sMem.z; 2505 }else{ 2506 zData = pC->aRow; 2507 } 2508 2509 /* Fill in pC->aType[i] and aOffset[i] values through the p2-th field. */ 2510 op_column_read_header: 2511 i = pC->nHdrParsed; 2512 offset64 = aOffset[i]; 2513 zHdr = zData + pC->iHdrOffset; 2514 zEndHdr = zData + aOffset[0]; 2515 do{ 2516 if( (t = zHdr[0])<0x80 ){ 2517 zHdr++; 2518 offset64 += sqlite3VdbeOneByteSerialTypeLen(t); 2519 }else{ 2520 zHdr += sqlite3GetVarint32(zHdr, &t); 2521 offset64 += sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(t); 2522 } 2523 pC->aType[i++] = t; 2524 aOffset[i] = (u32)(offset64 & 0xffffffff); 2525 }while( i<=p2 && zHdr<zEndHdr ); 2526 2527 /* The record is corrupt if any of the following are true: 2528 ** (1) the bytes of the header extend past the declared header size 2529 ** (2) the entire header was used but not all data was used 2530 ** (3) the end of the data extends beyond the end of the record. 2531 */ 2532 if( (zHdr>=zEndHdr && (zHdr>zEndHdr || offset64!=pC->payloadSize)) 2533 || (offset64 > pC->payloadSize) 2534 ){ 2535 if( pC->aRow==0 ) sqlite3VdbeMemRelease(&sMem); 2536 rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; 2537 goto abort_due_to_error; 2538 } 2539 2540 pC->nHdrParsed = i; 2541 pC->iHdrOffset = (u32)(zHdr - zData); 2542 if( pC->aRow==0 ) sqlite3VdbeMemRelease(&sMem); 2543 }else{ 2544 t = 0; 2545 } 2546 2547 /* If after trying to extract new entries from the header, nHdrParsed is 2548 ** still not up to p2, that means that the record has fewer than p2 2549 ** columns. So the result will be either the default value or a NULL. 2550 */ 2551 if( pC->nHdrParsed<=p2 ){ 2552 if( pOp->p4type==P4_MEM ){ 2553 sqlite3VdbeMemShallowCopy(pDest, pOp->p4.pMem, MEM_Static); 2554 }else{ 2555 sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pDest); 2556 } 2557 goto op_column_out; 2558 } 2559 }else{ 2560 t = pC->aType[p2]; 2561 } 2562 2563 /* Extract the content for the p2+1-th column. Control can only 2564 ** reach this point if aOffset[p2], aOffset[p2+1], and pC->aType[p2] are 2565 ** all valid. 2566 */ 2567 assert( p2<pC->nHdrParsed ); 2568 assert( rc==SQLITE_OK ); 2569 assert( sqlite3VdbeCheckMemInvariants(pDest) ); 2570 if( VdbeMemDynamic(pDest) ){ 2571 sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pDest); 2572 } 2573 assert( t==pC->aType[p2] ); 2574 if( pC->szRow>=aOffset[p2+1] ){ 2575 /* This is the common case where the desired content fits on the original 2576 ** page - where the content is not on an overflow page */ 2577 zData = pC->aRow + aOffset[p2]; 2578 if( t<12 ){ 2579 sqlite3VdbeSerialGet(zData, t, pDest); 2580 }else{ 2581 /* If the column value is a string, we need a persistent value, not 2582 ** a MEM_Ephem value. This branch is a fast short-cut that is equivalent 2583 ** to calling sqlite3VdbeSerialGet() and sqlite3VdbeDeephemeralize(). 2584 */ 2585 static const u16 aFlag[] = { MEM_Blob, MEM_Str|MEM_Term }; 2586 pDest->n = len = (t-12)/2; 2587 pDest->enc = encoding; 2588 if( pDest->szMalloc < len+2 ){ 2589 pDest->flags = MEM_Null; 2590 if( sqlite3VdbeMemGrow(pDest, len+2, 0) ) goto no_mem; 2591 }else{ 2592 pDest->z = pDest->zMalloc; 2593 } 2594 memcpy(pDest->z, zData, len); 2595 pDest->z[len] = 0; 2596 pDest->z[len+1] = 0; 2597 pDest->flags = aFlag[t&1]; 2598 } 2599 }else{ 2600 pDest->enc = encoding; 2601 /* This branch happens only when content is on overflow pages */ 2602 if( ((pOp->p5 & (OPFLAG_LENGTHARG|OPFLAG_TYPEOFARG))!=0 2603 && ((t>=12 && (t&1)==0) || (pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_TYPEOFARG)!=0)) 2604 || (len = sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(t))==0 2605 ){ 2606 /* Content is irrelevant for 2607 ** 1. the typeof() function, 2608 ** 2. the length(X) function if X is a blob, and 2609 ** 3. if the content length is zero. 2610 ** So we might as well use bogus content rather than reading 2611 ** content from disk. */ 2612 static u8 aZero[8]; /* This is the bogus content */ 2613 sqlite3VdbeSerialGet(aZero, t, pDest); 2614 }else{ 2615 rc = sqlite3VdbeMemFromBtree(pCrsr, aOffset[p2], len, !pC->isTable, 2616 pDest); 2617 if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto abort_due_to_error; 2618 sqlite3VdbeSerialGet((const u8*)pDest->z, t, pDest); 2619 pDest->flags &= ~MEM_Ephem; 2620 } 2621 } 2622 2623 op_column_out: 2624 UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pDest); 2625 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, pDest); 2626 break; 2627 } 2628 2629 /* Opcode: Affinity P1 P2 * P4 * 2630 ** Synopsis: affinity(r[P1@P2]) 2631 ** 2632 ** Apply affinities to a range of P2 registers starting with P1. 2633 ** 2634 ** P4 is a string that is P2 characters long. The nth character of the 2635 ** string indicates the column affinity that should be used for the nth 2636 ** memory cell in the range. 2637 */ 2638 case OP_Affinity: { 2639 const char *zAffinity; /* The affinity to be applied */ 2640 char cAff; /* A single character of affinity */ 2641 2642 zAffinity = pOp->p4.z; 2643 assert( zAffinity!=0 ); 2644 assert( zAffinity[pOp->p2]==0 ); 2645 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 2646 while( (cAff = *(zAffinity++))!=0 ){ 2647 assert( pIn1 <= &p->aMem[(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)] ); 2648 assert( memIsValid(pIn1) ); 2649 applyAffinity(pIn1, cAff, encoding); 2650 pIn1++; 2651 } 2652 break; 2653 } 2654 2655 /* Opcode: MakeRecord P1 P2 P3 P4 * 2656 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=mkrec(r[P1@P2]) 2657 ** 2658 ** Convert P2 registers beginning with P1 into the [record format] 2659 ** use as a data record in a database table or as a key 2660 ** in an index. The OP_Column opcode can decode the record later. 2661 ** 2662 ** P4 may be a string that is P2 characters long. The nth character of the 2663 ** string indicates the column affinity that should be used for the nth 2664 ** field of the index key. 2665 ** 2666 ** The mapping from character to affinity is given by the SQLITE_AFF_ 2667 ** macros defined in sqliteInt.h. 2668 ** 2669 ** If P4 is NULL then all index fields have the affinity BLOB. 2670 */ 2671 case OP_MakeRecord: { 2672 u8 *zNewRecord; /* A buffer to hold the data for the new record */ 2673 Mem *pRec; /* The new record */ 2674 u64 nData; /* Number of bytes of data space */ 2675 int nHdr; /* Number of bytes of header space */ 2676 i64 nByte; /* Data space required for this record */ 2677 i64 nZero; /* Number of zero bytes at the end of the record */ 2678 int nVarint; /* Number of bytes in a varint */ 2679 u32 serial_type; /* Type field */ 2680 Mem *pData0; /* First field to be combined into the record */ 2681 Mem *pLast; /* Last field of the record */ 2682 int nField; /* Number of fields in the record */ 2683 char *zAffinity; /* The affinity string for the record */ 2684 int file_format; /* File format to use for encoding */ 2685 int i; /* Space used in zNewRecord[] header */ 2686 int j; /* Space used in zNewRecord[] content */ 2687 u32 len; /* Length of a field */ 2688 2689 /* Assuming the record contains N fields, the record format looks 2690 ** like this: 2691 ** 2692 ** ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2693 ** | hdr-size | type 0 | type 1 | ... | type N-1 | data0 | ... | data N-1 | 2694 ** ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2695 ** 2696 ** Data(0) is taken from register P1. Data(1) comes from register P1+1 2697 ** and so forth. 2698 ** 2699 ** Each type field is a varint representing the serial type of the 2700 ** corresponding data element (see sqlite3VdbeSerialType()). The 2701 ** hdr-size field is also a varint which is the offset from the beginning 2702 ** of the record to data0. 2703 */ 2704 nData = 0; /* Number of bytes of data space */ 2705 nHdr = 0; /* Number of bytes of header space */ 2706 nZero = 0; /* Number of zero bytes at the end of the record */ 2707 nField = pOp->p1; 2708 zAffinity = pOp->p4.z; 2709 assert( nField>0 && pOp->p2>0 && pOp->p2+nField<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)+1 ); 2710 pData0 = &aMem[nField]; 2711 nField = pOp->p2; 2712 pLast = &pData0[nField-1]; 2713 file_format = p->minWriteFileFormat; 2714 2715 /* Identify the output register */ 2716 assert( pOp->p3<pOp->p1 || pOp->p3>=pOp->p1+pOp->p2 ); 2717 pOut = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 2718 memAboutToChange(p, pOut); 2719 2720 /* Apply the requested affinity to all inputs 2721 */ 2722 assert( pData0<=pLast ); 2723 if( zAffinity ){ 2724 pRec = pData0; 2725 do{ 2726 applyAffinity(pRec++, *(zAffinity++), encoding); 2727 assert( zAffinity[0]==0 || pRec<=pLast ); 2728 }while( zAffinity[0] ); 2729 } 2730 2731 /* Loop through the elements that will make up the record to figure 2732 ** out how much space is required for the new record. 2733 */ 2734 pRec = pLast; 2735 do{ 2736 assert( memIsValid(pRec) ); 2737 pRec->uTemp = serial_type = sqlite3VdbeSerialType(pRec, file_format, &len); 2738 if( pRec->flags & MEM_Zero ){ 2739 if( nData ){ 2740 if( sqlite3VdbeMemExpandBlob(pRec) ) goto no_mem; 2741 }else{ 2742 nZero += pRec->u.nZero; 2743 len -= pRec->u.nZero; 2744 } 2745 } 2746 nData += len; 2747 testcase( serial_type==127 ); 2748 testcase( serial_type==128 ); 2749 nHdr += serial_type<=127 ? 1 : sqlite3VarintLen(serial_type); 2750 if( pRec==pData0 ) break; 2751 pRec--; 2752 }while(1); 2753 2754 /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-22564-11647 The header begins with a single varint 2755 ** which determines the total number of bytes in the header. The varint 2756 ** value is the size of the header in bytes including the size varint 2757 ** itself. */ 2758 testcase( nHdr==126 ); 2759 testcase( nHdr==127 ); 2760 if( nHdr<=126 ){ 2761 /* The common case */ 2762 nHdr += 1; 2763 }else{ 2764 /* Rare case of a really large header */ 2765 nVarint = sqlite3VarintLen(nHdr); 2766 nHdr += nVarint; 2767 if( nVarint<sqlite3VarintLen(nHdr) ) nHdr++; 2768 } 2769 nByte = nHdr+nData; 2770 if( nByte+nZero>db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_LENGTH] ){ 2771 goto too_big; 2772 } 2773 2774 /* Make sure the output register has a buffer large enough to store 2775 ** the new record. The output register (pOp->p3) is not allowed to 2776 ** be one of the input registers (because the following call to 2777 ** sqlite3VdbeMemClearAndResize() could clobber the value before it is used). 2778 */ 2779 if( sqlite3VdbeMemClearAndResize(pOut, (int)nByte) ){ 2780 goto no_mem; 2781 } 2782 zNewRecord = (u8 *)pOut->z; 2783 2784 /* Write the record */ 2785 i = putVarint32(zNewRecord, nHdr); 2786 j = nHdr; 2787 assert( pData0<=pLast ); 2788 pRec = pData0; 2789 do{ 2790 serial_type = pRec->uTemp; 2791 /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-06529-47362 Following the size varint are one or more 2792 ** additional varints, one per column. */ 2793 i += putVarint32(&zNewRecord[i], serial_type); /* serial type */ 2794 /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-64536-51728 The values for each column in the record 2795 ** immediately follow the header. */ 2796 j += sqlite3VdbeSerialPut(&zNewRecord[j], pRec, serial_type); /* content */ 2797 }while( (++pRec)<=pLast ); 2798 assert( i==nHdr ); 2799 assert( j==nByte ); 2800 2801 assert( pOp->p3>0 && pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); 2802 pOut->n = (int)nByte; 2803 pOut->flags = MEM_Blob; 2804 if( nZero ){ 2805 pOut->u.nZero = nZero; 2806 pOut->flags |= MEM_Zero; 2807 } 2808 pOut->enc = SQLITE_UTF8; /* In case the blob is ever converted to text */ 2809 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, pOut); 2810 UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pOut); 2811 break; 2812 } 2813 2814 /* Opcode: Count P1 P2 * * * 2815 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=count() 2816 ** 2817 ** Store the number of entries (an integer value) in the table or index 2818 ** opened by cursor P1 in register P2 2819 */ 2820 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_BTREECOUNT 2821 case OP_Count: { /* out2 */ 2822 i64 nEntry; 2823 BtCursor *pCrsr; 2824 2825 assert( p->apCsr[pOp->p1]->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 2826 pCrsr = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]->uc.pCursor; 2827 assert( pCrsr ); 2828 nEntry = 0; /* Not needed. Only used to silence a warning. */ 2829 rc = sqlite3BtreeCount(pCrsr, &nEntry); 2830 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 2831 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 2832 pOut->u.i = nEntry; 2833 break; 2834 } 2835 #endif 2836 2837 /* Opcode: Savepoint P1 * * P4 * 2838 ** 2839 ** Open, release or rollback the savepoint named by parameter P4, depending 2840 ** on the value of P1. To open a new savepoint, P1==0. To release (commit) an 2841 ** existing savepoint, P1==1, or to rollback an existing savepoint P1==2. 2842 */ 2843 case OP_Savepoint: { 2844 int p1; /* Value of P1 operand */ 2845 char *zName; /* Name of savepoint */ 2846 int nName; 2847 Savepoint *pNew; 2848 Savepoint *pSavepoint; 2849 Savepoint *pTmp; 2850 int iSavepoint; 2851 int ii; 2852 2853 p1 = pOp->p1; 2854 zName = pOp->p4.z; 2855 2856 /* Assert that the p1 parameter is valid. Also that if there is no open 2857 ** transaction, then there cannot be any savepoints. 2858 */ 2859 assert( db->pSavepoint==0 || db->autoCommit==0 ); 2860 assert( p1==SAVEPOINT_BEGIN||p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE||p1==SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ); 2861 assert( db->pSavepoint || db->isTransactionSavepoint==0 ); 2862 assert( checkSavepointCount(db) ); 2863 assert( p->bIsReader ); 2864 2865 if( p1==SAVEPOINT_BEGIN ){ 2866 if( db->nVdbeWrite>0 ){ 2867 /* A new savepoint cannot be created if there are active write 2868 ** statements (i.e. open read/write incremental blob handles). 2869 */ 2870 sqlite3VdbeError(p, "cannot open savepoint - SQL statements in progress"); 2871 rc = SQLITE_BUSY; 2872 }else{ 2873 nName = sqlite3Strlen30(zName); 2874 2875 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE 2876 /* This call is Ok even if this savepoint is actually a transaction 2877 ** savepoint (and therefore should not prompt xSavepoint()) callbacks. 2878 ** If this is a transaction savepoint being opened, it is guaranteed 2879 ** that the db->aVTrans[] array is empty. */ 2880 assert( db->autoCommit==0 || db->nVTrans==0 ); 2881 rc = sqlite3VtabSavepoint(db, SAVEPOINT_BEGIN, 2882 db->nStatement+db->nSavepoint); 2883 if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto abort_due_to_error; 2884 #endif 2885 2886 /* Create a new savepoint structure. */ 2887 pNew = sqlite3DbMallocRawNN(db, sizeof(Savepoint)+nName+1); 2888 if( pNew ){ 2889 pNew->zName = (char *)&pNew[1]; 2890 memcpy(pNew->zName, zName, nName+1); 2891 2892 /* If there is no open transaction, then mark this as a special 2893 ** "transaction savepoint". */ 2894 if( db->autoCommit ){ 2895 db->autoCommit = 0; 2896 db->isTransactionSavepoint = 1; 2897 }else{ 2898 db->nSavepoint++; 2899 } 2900 2901 /* Link the new savepoint into the database handle's list. */ 2902 pNew->pNext = db->pSavepoint; 2903 db->pSavepoint = pNew; 2904 pNew->nDeferredCons = db->nDeferredCons; 2905 pNew->nDeferredImmCons = db->nDeferredImmCons; 2906 } 2907 } 2908 }else{ 2909 iSavepoint = 0; 2910 2911 /* Find the named savepoint. If there is no such savepoint, then an 2912 ** an error is returned to the user. */ 2913 for( 2914 pSavepoint = db->pSavepoint; 2915 pSavepoint && sqlite3StrICmp(pSavepoint->zName, zName); 2916 pSavepoint = pSavepoint->pNext 2917 ){ 2918 iSavepoint++; 2919 } 2920 if( !pSavepoint ){ 2921 sqlite3VdbeError(p, "no such savepoint: %s", zName); 2922 rc = SQLITE_ERROR; 2923 }else if( db->nVdbeWrite>0 && p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ){ 2924 /* It is not possible to release (commit) a savepoint if there are 2925 ** active write statements. 2926 */ 2927 sqlite3VdbeError(p, "cannot release savepoint - " 2928 "SQL statements in progress"); 2929 rc = SQLITE_BUSY; 2930 }else{ 2931 2932 /* Determine whether or not this is a transaction savepoint. If so, 2933 ** and this is a RELEASE command, then the current transaction 2934 ** is committed. 2935 */ 2936 int isTransaction = pSavepoint->pNext==0 && db->isTransactionSavepoint; 2937 if( isTransaction && p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ){ 2938 if( (rc = sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(p, 1))!=SQLITE_OK ){ 2939 goto vdbe_return; 2940 } 2941 db->autoCommit = 1; 2942 if( sqlite3VdbeHalt(p)==SQLITE_BUSY ){ 2943 p->pc = (int)(pOp - aOp); 2944 db->autoCommit = 0; 2945 p->rc = rc = SQLITE_BUSY; 2946 goto vdbe_return; 2947 } 2948 db->isTransactionSavepoint = 0; 2949 rc = p->rc; 2950 }else{ 2951 int isSchemaChange; 2952 iSavepoint = db->nSavepoint - iSavepoint - 1; 2953 if( p1==SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ){ 2954 isSchemaChange = (db->flags & SQLITE_InternChanges)!=0; 2955 for(ii=0; ii<db->nDb; ii++){ 2956 rc = sqlite3BtreeTripAllCursors(db->aDb[ii].pBt, 2957 SQLITE_ABORT_ROLLBACK, 2958 isSchemaChange==0); 2959 if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto abort_due_to_error; 2960 } 2961 }else{ 2962 isSchemaChange = 0; 2963 } 2964 for(ii=0; ii<db->nDb; ii++){ 2965 rc = sqlite3BtreeSavepoint(db->aDb[ii].pBt, p1, iSavepoint); 2966 if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ 2967 goto abort_due_to_error; 2968 } 2969 } 2970 if( isSchemaChange ){ 2971 sqlite3ExpirePreparedStatements(db); 2972 sqlite3ResetAllSchemasOfConnection(db); 2973 db->flags = (db->flags | SQLITE_InternChanges); 2974 } 2975 } 2976 2977 /* Regardless of whether this is a RELEASE or ROLLBACK, destroy all 2978 ** savepoints nested inside of the savepoint being operated on. */ 2979 while( db->pSavepoint!=pSavepoint ){ 2980 pTmp = db->pSavepoint; 2981 db->pSavepoint = pTmp->pNext; 2982 sqlite3DbFree(db, pTmp); 2983 db->nSavepoint--; 2984 } 2985 2986 /* If it is a RELEASE, then destroy the savepoint being operated on 2987 ** too. If it is a ROLLBACK TO, then set the number of deferred 2988 ** constraint violations present in the database to the value stored 2989 ** when the savepoint was created. */ 2990 if( p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ){ 2991 assert( pSavepoint==db->pSavepoint ); 2992 db->pSavepoint = pSavepoint->pNext; 2993 sqlite3DbFree(db, pSavepoint); 2994 if( !isTransaction ){ 2995 db->nSavepoint--; 2996 } 2997 }else{ 2998 db->nDeferredCons = pSavepoint->nDeferredCons; 2999 db->nDeferredImmCons = pSavepoint->nDeferredImmCons; 3000 } 3001 3002 if( !isTransaction || p1==SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ){ 3003 rc = sqlite3VtabSavepoint(db, p1, iSavepoint); 3004 if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto abort_due_to_error; 3005 } 3006 } 3007 } 3008 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 3009 3010 break; 3011 } 3012 3013 /* Opcode: AutoCommit P1 P2 * * * 3014 ** 3015 ** Set the database auto-commit flag to P1 (1 or 0). If P2 is true, roll 3016 ** back any currently active btree transactions. If there are any active 3017 ** VMs (apart from this one), then a ROLLBACK fails. A COMMIT fails if 3018 ** there are active writing VMs or active VMs that use shared cache. 3019 ** 3020 ** This instruction causes the VM to halt. 3021 */ 3022 case OP_AutoCommit: { 3023 int desiredAutoCommit; 3024 int iRollback; 3025 3026 desiredAutoCommit = pOp->p1; 3027 iRollback = pOp->p2; 3028 assert( desiredAutoCommit==1 || desiredAutoCommit==0 ); 3029 assert( desiredAutoCommit==1 || iRollback==0 ); 3030 assert( db->nVdbeActive>0 ); /* At least this one VM is active */ 3031 assert( p->bIsReader ); 3032 3033 if( desiredAutoCommit!=db->autoCommit ){ 3034 if( iRollback ){ 3035 assert( desiredAutoCommit==1 ); 3036 sqlite3RollbackAll(db, SQLITE_ABORT_ROLLBACK); 3037 db->autoCommit = 1; 3038 }else if( desiredAutoCommit && db->nVdbeWrite>0 ){ 3039 /* If this instruction implements a COMMIT and other VMs are writing 3040 ** return an error indicating that the other VMs must complete first. 3041 */ 3042 sqlite3VdbeError(p, "cannot commit transaction - " 3043 "SQL statements in progress"); 3044 rc = SQLITE_BUSY; 3045 goto abort_due_to_error; 3046 }else if( (rc = sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(p, 1))!=SQLITE_OK ){ 3047 goto vdbe_return; 3048 }else{ 3049 db->autoCommit = (u8)desiredAutoCommit; 3050 } 3051 if( sqlite3VdbeHalt(p)==SQLITE_BUSY ){ 3052 p->pc = (int)(pOp - aOp); 3053 db->autoCommit = (u8)(1-desiredAutoCommit); 3054 p->rc = rc = SQLITE_BUSY; 3055 goto vdbe_return; 3056 } 3057 assert( db->nStatement==0 ); 3058 sqlite3CloseSavepoints(db); 3059 if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){ 3060 rc = SQLITE_DONE; 3061 }else{ 3062 rc = SQLITE_ERROR; 3063 } 3064 goto vdbe_return; 3065 }else{ 3066 sqlite3VdbeError(p, 3067 (!desiredAutoCommit)?"cannot start a transaction within a transaction":( 3068 (iRollback)?"cannot rollback - no transaction is active": 3069 "cannot commit - no transaction is active")); 3070 3071 rc = SQLITE_ERROR; 3072 goto abort_due_to_error; 3073 } 3074 break; 3075 } 3076 3077 /* Opcode: Transaction P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 3078 ** 3079 ** Begin a transaction on database P1 if a transaction is not already 3080 ** active. 3081 ** If P2 is non-zero, then a write-transaction is started, or if a 3082 ** read-transaction is already active, it is upgraded to a write-transaction. 3083 ** If P2 is zero, then a read-transaction is started. 3084 ** 3085 ** P1 is the index of the database file on which the transaction is 3086 ** started. Index 0 is the main database file and index 1 is the 3087 ** file used for temporary tables. Indices of 2 or more are used for 3088 ** attached databases. 3089 ** 3090 ** If a write-transaction is started and the Vdbe.usesStmtJournal flag is 3091 ** true (this flag is set if the Vdbe may modify more than one row and may 3092 ** throw an ABORT exception), a statement transaction may also be opened. 3093 ** More specifically, a statement transaction is opened iff the database 3094 ** connection is currently not in autocommit mode, or if there are other 3095 ** active statements. A statement transaction allows the changes made by this 3096 ** VDBE to be rolled back after an error without having to roll back the 3097 ** entire transaction. If no error is encountered, the statement transaction 3098 ** will automatically commit when the VDBE halts. 3099 ** 3100 ** If P5!=0 then this opcode also checks the schema cookie against P3 3101 ** and the schema generation counter against P4. 3102 ** The cookie changes its value whenever the database schema changes. 3103 ** This operation is used to detect when that the cookie has changed 3104 ** and that the current process needs to reread the schema. If the schema 3105 ** cookie in P3 differs from the schema cookie in the database header or 3106 ** if the schema generation counter in P4 differs from the current 3107 ** generation counter, then an SQLITE_SCHEMA error is raised and execution 3108 ** halts. The sqlite3_step() wrapper function might then reprepare the 3109 ** statement and rerun it from the beginning. 3110 */ 3111 case OP_Transaction: { 3112 Btree *pBt; 3113 int iMeta; 3114 int iGen; 3115 3116 assert( p->bIsReader ); 3117 assert( p->readOnly==0 || pOp->p2==0 ); 3118 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb ); 3119 assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, pOp->p1) ); 3120 if( pOp->p2 && (db->flags & SQLITE_QueryOnly)!=0 ){ 3121 rc = SQLITE_READONLY; 3122 goto abort_due_to_error; 3123 } 3124 pBt = db->aDb[pOp->p1].pBt; 3125 3126 if( pBt ){ 3127 rc = sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(pBt, pOp->p2); 3128 testcase( rc==SQLITE_BUSY_SNAPSHOT ); 3129 testcase( rc==SQLITE_BUSY_RECOVERY ); 3130 if( (rc&0xff)==SQLITE_BUSY ){ 3131 p->pc = (int)(pOp - aOp); 3132 p->rc = rc; 3133 goto vdbe_return; 3134 } 3135 if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ 3136 goto abort_due_to_error; 3137 } 3138 3139 if( pOp->p2 && p->usesStmtJournal 3140 && (db->autoCommit==0 || db->nVdbeRead>1) 3141 ){ 3142 assert( sqlite3BtreeIsInTrans(pBt) ); 3143 if( p->iStatement==0 ){ 3144 assert( db->nStatement>=0 && db->nSavepoint>=0 ); 3145 db->nStatement++; 3146 p->iStatement = db->nSavepoint + db->nStatement; 3147 } 3148 3149 rc = sqlite3VtabSavepoint(db, SAVEPOINT_BEGIN, p->iStatement-1); 3150 if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ 3151 rc = sqlite3BtreeBeginStmt(pBt, p->iStatement); 3152 } 3153 3154 /* Store the current value of the database handles deferred constraint 3155 ** counter. If the statement transaction needs to be rolled back, 3156 ** the value of this counter needs to be restored too. */ 3157 p->nStmtDefCons = db->nDeferredCons; 3158 p->nStmtDefImmCons = db->nDeferredImmCons; 3159 } 3160 3161 /* Gather the schema version number for checking: 3162 ** IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-32195-19465 The schema version is used by SQLite 3163 ** each time a query is executed to ensure that the internal cache of the 3164 ** schema used when compiling the SQL query matches the schema of the 3165 ** database against which the compiled query is actually executed. 3166 */ 3167 sqlite3BtreeGetMeta(pBt, BTREE_SCHEMA_VERSION, (u32 *)&iMeta); 3168 iGen = db->aDb[pOp->p1].pSchema->iGeneration; 3169 }else{ 3170 iGen = iMeta = 0; 3171 } 3172 assert( pOp->p5==0 || pOp->p4type==P4_INT32 ); 3173 if( pOp->p5 && (iMeta!=pOp->p3 || iGen!=pOp->p4.i) ){ 3174 sqlite3DbFree(db, p->zErrMsg); 3175 p->zErrMsg = sqlite3DbStrDup(db, "database schema has changed"); 3176 /* If the schema-cookie from the database file matches the cookie 3177 ** stored with the in-memory representation of the schema, do 3178 ** not reload the schema from the database file. 3179 ** 3180 ** If virtual-tables are in use, this is not just an optimization. 3181 ** Often, v-tables store their data in other SQLite tables, which 3182 ** are queried from within xNext() and other v-table methods using 3183 ** prepared queries. If such a query is out-of-date, we do not want to 3184 ** discard the database schema, as the user code implementing the 3185 ** v-table would have to be ready for the sqlite3_vtab structure itself 3186 ** to be invalidated whenever sqlite3_step() is called from within 3187 ** a v-table method. 3188 */ 3189 if( db->aDb[pOp->p1].pSchema->schema_cookie!=iMeta ){ 3190 sqlite3ResetOneSchema(db, pOp->p1); 3191 } 3192 p->expired = 1; 3193 rc = SQLITE_SCHEMA; 3194 } 3195 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 3196 break; 3197 } 3198 3199 /* Opcode: ReadCookie P1 P2 P3 * * 3200 ** 3201 ** Read cookie number P3 from database P1 and write it into register P2. 3202 ** P3==1 is the schema version. P3==2 is the database format. 3203 ** P3==3 is the recommended pager cache size, and so forth. P1==0 is 3204 ** the main database file and P1==1 is the database file used to store 3205 ** temporary tables. 3206 ** 3207 ** There must be a read-lock on the database (either a transaction 3208 ** must be started or there must be an open cursor) before 3209 ** executing this instruction. 3210 */ 3211 case OP_ReadCookie: { /* out2 */ 3212 int iMeta; 3213 int iDb; 3214 int iCookie; 3215 3216 assert( p->bIsReader ); 3217 iDb = pOp->p1; 3218 iCookie = pOp->p3; 3219 assert( pOp->p3<SQLITE_N_BTREE_META ); 3220 assert( iDb>=0 && iDb<db->nDb ); 3221 assert( db->aDb[iDb].pBt!=0 ); 3222 assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, iDb) ); 3223 3224 sqlite3BtreeGetMeta(db->aDb[iDb].pBt, iCookie, (u32 *)&iMeta); 3225 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 3226 pOut->u.i = iMeta; 3227 break; 3228 } 3229 3230 /* Opcode: SetCookie P1 P2 P3 * * 3231 ** 3232 ** Write the integer value P3 into cookie number P2 of database P1. 3233 ** P2==1 is the schema version. P2==2 is the database format. 3234 ** P2==3 is the recommended pager cache 3235 ** size, and so forth. P1==0 is the main database file and P1==1 is the 3236 ** database file used to store temporary tables. 3237 ** 3238 ** A transaction must be started before executing this opcode. 3239 */ 3240 case OP_SetCookie: { 3241 Db *pDb; 3242 assert( pOp->p2<SQLITE_N_BTREE_META ); 3243 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb ); 3244 assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, pOp->p1) ); 3245 assert( p->readOnly==0 ); 3246 pDb = &db->aDb[pOp->p1]; 3247 assert( pDb->pBt!=0 ); 3248 assert( sqlite3SchemaMutexHeld(db, pOp->p1, 0) ); 3249 /* See note about index shifting on OP_ReadCookie */ 3250 rc = sqlite3BtreeUpdateMeta(pDb->pBt, pOp->p2, pOp->p3); 3251 if( pOp->p2==BTREE_SCHEMA_VERSION ){ 3252 /* When the schema cookie changes, record the new cookie internally */ 3253 pDb->pSchema->schema_cookie = pOp->p3; 3254 db->flags |= SQLITE_InternChanges; 3255 }else if( pOp->p2==BTREE_FILE_FORMAT ){ 3256 /* Record changes in the file format */ 3257 pDb->pSchema->file_format = pOp->p3; 3258 } 3259 if( pOp->p1==1 ){ 3260 /* Invalidate all prepared statements whenever the TEMP database 3261 ** schema is changed. Ticket #1644 */ 3262 sqlite3ExpirePreparedStatements(db); 3263 p->expired = 0; 3264 } 3265 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 3266 break; 3267 } 3268 3269 /* Opcode: OpenRead P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 3270 ** Synopsis: root=P2 iDb=P3 3271 ** 3272 ** Open a read-only cursor for the database table whose root page is 3273 ** P2 in a database file. The database file is determined by P3. 3274 ** P3==0 means the main database, P3==1 means the database used for 3275 ** temporary tables, and P3>1 means used the corresponding attached 3276 ** database. Give the new cursor an identifier of P1. The P1 3277 ** values need not be contiguous but all P1 values should be small integers. 3278 ** It is an error for P1 to be negative. 3279 ** 3280 ** If P5!=0 then use the content of register P2 as the root page, not 3281 ** the value of P2 itself. 3282 ** 3283 ** There will be a read lock on the database whenever there is an 3284 ** open cursor. If the database was unlocked prior to this instruction 3285 ** then a read lock is acquired as part of this instruction. A read 3286 ** lock allows other processes to read the database but prohibits 3287 ** any other process from modifying the database. The read lock is 3288 ** released when all cursors are closed. If this instruction attempts 3289 ** to get a read lock but fails, the script terminates with an 3290 ** SQLITE_BUSY error code. 3291 ** 3292 ** The P4 value may be either an integer (P4_INT32) or a pointer to 3293 ** a KeyInfo structure (P4_KEYINFO). If it is a pointer to a KeyInfo 3294 ** structure, then said structure defines the content and collating 3295 ** sequence of the index being opened. Otherwise, if P4 is an integer 3296 ** value, it is set to the number of columns in the table. 3297 ** 3298 ** See also: OpenWrite, ReopenIdx 3299 */ 3300 /* Opcode: ReopenIdx P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 3301 ** Synopsis: root=P2 iDb=P3 3302 ** 3303 ** The ReopenIdx opcode works exactly like ReadOpen except that it first 3304 ** checks to see if the cursor on P1 is already open with a root page 3305 ** number of P2 and if it is this opcode becomes a no-op. In other words, 3306 ** if the cursor is already open, do not reopen it. 3307 ** 3308 ** The ReopenIdx opcode may only be used with P5==0 and with P4 being 3309 ** a P4_KEYINFO object. Furthermore, the P3 value must be the same as 3310 ** every other ReopenIdx or OpenRead for the same cursor number. 3311 ** 3312 ** See the OpenRead opcode documentation for additional information. 3313 */ 3314 /* Opcode: OpenWrite P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 3315 ** Synopsis: root=P2 iDb=P3 3316 ** 3317 ** Open a read/write cursor named P1 on the table or index whose root 3318 ** page is P2. Or if P5!=0 use the content of register P2 to find the 3319 ** root page. 3320 ** 3321 ** The P4 value may be either an integer (P4_INT32) or a pointer to 3322 ** a KeyInfo structure (P4_KEYINFO). If it is a pointer to a KeyInfo 3323 ** structure, then said structure defines the content and collating 3324 ** sequence of the index being opened. Otherwise, if P4 is an integer 3325 ** value, it is set to the number of columns in the table, or to the 3326 ** largest index of any column of the table that is actually used. 3327 ** 3328 ** This instruction works just like OpenRead except that it opens the cursor 3329 ** in read/write mode. For a given table, there can be one or more read-only 3330 ** cursors or a single read/write cursor but not both. 3331 ** 3332 ** See also OpenRead. 3333 */ 3334 case OP_ReopenIdx: { 3335 int nField; 3336 KeyInfo *pKeyInfo; 3337 int p2; 3338 int iDb; 3339 int wrFlag; 3340 Btree *pX; 3341 VdbeCursor *pCur; 3342 Db *pDb; 3343 3344 assert( pOp->p5==0 || pOp->p5==OPFLAG_SEEKEQ ); 3345 assert( pOp->p4type==P4_KEYINFO ); 3346 pCur = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 3347 if( pCur && pCur->pgnoRoot==(u32)pOp->p2 ){ 3348 assert( pCur->iDb==pOp->p3 ); /* Guaranteed by the code generator */ 3349 goto open_cursor_set_hints; 3350 } 3351 /* If the cursor is not currently open or is open on a different 3352 ** index, then fall through into OP_OpenRead to force a reopen */ 3353 case OP_OpenRead: 3354 case OP_OpenWrite: 3355 3356 assert( pOp->opcode==OP_OpenWrite || pOp->p5==0 || pOp->p5==OPFLAG_SEEKEQ ); 3357 assert( p->bIsReader ); 3358 assert( pOp->opcode==OP_OpenRead || pOp->opcode==OP_ReopenIdx 3359 || p->readOnly==0 ); 3360 3361 if( p->expired ){ 3362 rc = SQLITE_ABORT_ROLLBACK; 3363 goto abort_due_to_error; 3364 } 3365 3366 nField = 0; 3367 pKeyInfo = 0; 3368 p2 = pOp->p2; 3369 iDb = pOp->p3; 3370 assert( iDb>=0 && iDb<db->nDb ); 3371 assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, iDb) ); 3372 pDb = &db->aDb[iDb]; 3373 pX = pDb->pBt; 3374 assert( pX!=0 ); 3375 if( pOp->opcode==OP_OpenWrite ){ 3376 assert( OPFLAG_FORDELETE==BTREE_FORDELETE ); 3377 wrFlag = BTREE_WRCSR | (pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_FORDELETE); 3378 assert( sqlite3SchemaMutexHeld(db, iDb, 0) ); 3379 if( pDb->pSchema->file_format < p->minWriteFileFormat ){ 3380 p->minWriteFileFormat = pDb->pSchema->file_format; 3381 } 3382 }else{ 3383 wrFlag = 0; 3384 } 3385 if( pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_P2ISREG ){ 3386 assert( p2>0 ); 3387 assert( p2<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); 3388 pIn2 = &aMem[p2]; 3389 assert( memIsValid(pIn2) ); 3390 assert( (pIn2->flags & MEM_Int)!=0 ); 3391 sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pIn2); 3392 p2 = (int)pIn2->u.i; 3393 /* The p2 value always comes from a prior OP_CreateTable opcode and 3394 ** that opcode will always set the p2 value to 2 or more or else fail. 3395 ** If there were a failure, the prepared statement would have halted 3396 ** before reaching this instruction. */ 3397 assert( p2>=2 ); 3398 } 3399 if( pOp->p4type==P4_KEYINFO ){ 3400 pKeyInfo = pOp->p4.pKeyInfo; 3401 assert( pKeyInfo->enc==ENC(db) ); 3402 assert( pKeyInfo->db==db ); 3403 nField = pKeyInfo->nField+pKeyInfo->nXField; 3404 }else if( pOp->p4type==P4_INT32 ){ 3405 nField = pOp->p4.i; 3406 } 3407 assert( pOp->p1>=0 ); 3408 assert( nField>=0 ); 3409 testcase( nField==0 ); /* Table with INTEGER PRIMARY KEY and nothing else */ 3410 pCur = allocateCursor(p, pOp->p1, nField, iDb, CURTYPE_BTREE); 3411 if( pCur==0 ) goto no_mem; 3412 pCur->nullRow = 1; 3413 pCur->isOrdered = 1; 3414 pCur->pgnoRoot = p2; 3415 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 3416 pCur->wrFlag = wrFlag; 3417 #endif 3418 rc = sqlite3BtreeCursor(pX, p2, wrFlag, pKeyInfo, pCur->uc.pCursor); 3419 pCur->pKeyInfo = pKeyInfo; 3420 /* Set the VdbeCursor.isTable variable. Previous versions of 3421 ** SQLite used to check if the root-page flags were sane at this point 3422 ** and report database corruption if they were not, but this check has 3423 ** since moved into the btree layer. */ 3424 pCur->isTable = pOp->p4type!=P4_KEYINFO; 3425 3426 open_cursor_set_hints: 3427 assert( OPFLAG_BULKCSR==BTREE_BULKLOAD ); 3428 assert( OPFLAG_SEEKEQ==BTREE_SEEK_EQ ); 3429 testcase( pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_BULKCSR ); 3430 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_CURSOR_HINTS 3431 testcase( pOp->p2 & OPFLAG_SEEKEQ ); 3432 #endif 3433 sqlite3BtreeCursorHintFlags(pCur->uc.pCursor, 3434 (pOp->p5 & (OPFLAG_BULKCSR|OPFLAG_SEEKEQ))); 3435 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 3436 break; 3437 } 3438 3439 /* Opcode: OpenEphemeral P1 P2 * P4 P5 3440 ** Synopsis: nColumn=P2 3441 ** 3442 ** Open a new cursor P1 to a transient table. 3443 ** The cursor is always opened read/write even if 3444 ** the main database is read-only. The ephemeral 3445 ** table is deleted automatically when the cursor is closed. 3446 ** 3447 ** P2 is the number of columns in the ephemeral table. 3448 ** The cursor points to a BTree table if P4==0 and to a BTree index 3449 ** if P4 is not 0. If P4 is not NULL, it points to a KeyInfo structure 3450 ** that defines the format of keys in the index. 3451 ** 3452 ** The P5 parameter can be a mask of the BTREE_* flags defined 3453 ** in btree.h. These flags control aspects of the operation of 3454 ** the btree. The BTREE_OMIT_JOURNAL and BTREE_SINGLE flags are 3455 ** added automatically. 3456 */ 3457 /* Opcode: OpenAutoindex P1 P2 * P4 * 3458 ** Synopsis: nColumn=P2 3459 ** 3460 ** This opcode works the same as OP_OpenEphemeral. It has a 3461 ** different name to distinguish its use. Tables created using 3462 ** by this opcode will be used for automatically created transient 3463 ** indices in joins. 3464 */ 3465 case OP_OpenAutoindex: 3466 case OP_OpenEphemeral: { 3467 VdbeCursor *pCx; 3468 KeyInfo *pKeyInfo; 3469 3470 static const int vfsFlags = 3471 SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE | 3472 SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE | 3473 SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE | 3474 SQLITE_OPEN_DELETEONCLOSE | 3475 SQLITE_OPEN_TRANSIENT_DB; 3476 assert( pOp->p1>=0 ); 3477 assert( pOp->p2>=0 ); 3478 pCx = allocateCursor(p, pOp->p1, pOp->p2, -1, CURTYPE_BTREE); 3479 if( pCx==0 ) goto no_mem; 3480 pCx->nullRow = 1; 3481 pCx->isEphemeral = 1; 3482 rc = sqlite3BtreeOpen(db->pVfs, 0, db, &pCx->pBt, 3483 BTREE_OMIT_JOURNAL | BTREE_SINGLE | pOp->p5, vfsFlags); 3484 if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ 3485 rc = sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(pCx->pBt, 1); 3486 } 3487 if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ 3488 /* If a transient index is required, create it by calling 3489 ** sqlite3BtreeCreateTable() with the BTREE_BLOBKEY flag before 3490 ** opening it. If a transient table is required, just use the 3491 ** automatically created table with root-page 1 (an BLOB_INTKEY table). 3492 */ 3493 if( (pKeyInfo = pOp->p4.pKeyInfo)!=0 ){ 3494 int pgno; 3495 assert( pOp->p4type==P4_KEYINFO ); 3496 rc = sqlite3BtreeCreateTable(pCx->pBt, &pgno, BTREE_BLOBKEY | pOp->p5); 3497 if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ 3498 assert( pgno==MASTER_ROOT+1 ); 3499 assert( pKeyInfo->db==db ); 3500 assert( pKeyInfo->enc==ENC(db) ); 3501 pCx->pKeyInfo = pKeyInfo; 3502 rc = sqlite3BtreeCursor(pCx->pBt, pgno, BTREE_WRCSR, 3503 pKeyInfo, pCx->uc.pCursor); 3504 } 3505 pCx->isTable = 0; 3506 }else{ 3507 rc = sqlite3BtreeCursor(pCx->pBt, MASTER_ROOT, BTREE_WRCSR, 3508 0, pCx->uc.pCursor); 3509 pCx->isTable = 1; 3510 } 3511 } 3512 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 3513 pCx->isOrdered = (pOp->p5!=BTREE_UNORDERED); 3514 break; 3515 } 3516 3517 /* Opcode: SorterOpen P1 P2 P3 P4 * 3518 ** 3519 ** This opcode works like OP_OpenEphemeral except that it opens 3520 ** a transient index that is specifically designed to sort large 3521 ** tables using an external merge-sort algorithm. 3522 ** 3523 ** If argument P3 is non-zero, then it indicates that the sorter may 3524 ** assume that a stable sort considering the first P3 fields of each 3525 ** key is sufficient to produce the required results. 3526 */ 3527 case OP_SorterOpen: { 3528 VdbeCursor *pCx; 3529 3530 assert( pOp->p1>=0 ); 3531 assert( pOp->p2>=0 ); 3532 pCx = allocateCursor(p, pOp->p1, pOp->p2, -1, CURTYPE_SORTER); 3533 if( pCx==0 ) goto no_mem; 3534 pCx->pKeyInfo = pOp->p4.pKeyInfo; 3535 assert( pCx->pKeyInfo->db==db ); 3536 assert( pCx->pKeyInfo->enc==ENC(db) ); 3537 rc = sqlite3VdbeSorterInit(db, pOp->p3, pCx); 3538 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 3539 break; 3540 } 3541 3542 /* Opcode: SequenceTest P1 P2 * * * 3543 ** Synopsis: if( cursor[P1].ctr++ ) pc = P2 3544 ** 3545 ** P1 is a sorter cursor. If the sequence counter is currently zero, jump 3546 ** to P2. Regardless of whether or not the jump is taken, increment the 3547 ** the sequence value. 3548 */ 3549 case OP_SequenceTest: { 3550 VdbeCursor *pC; 3551 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 3552 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 3553 assert( isSorter(pC) ); 3554 if( (pC->seqCount++)==0 ){ 3555 goto jump_to_p2; 3556 } 3557 break; 3558 } 3559 3560 /* Opcode: OpenPseudo P1 P2 P3 * * 3561 ** Synopsis: P3 columns in r[P2] 3562 ** 3563 ** Open a new cursor that points to a fake table that contains a single 3564 ** row of data. The content of that one row is the content of memory 3565 ** register P2. In other words, cursor P1 becomes an alias for the 3566 ** MEM_Blob content contained in register P2. 3567 ** 3568 ** A pseudo-table created by this opcode is used to hold a single 3569 ** row output from the sorter so that the row can be decomposed into 3570 ** individual columns using the OP_Column opcode. The OP_Column opcode 3571 ** is the only cursor opcode that works with a pseudo-table. 3572 ** 3573 ** P3 is the number of fields in the records that will be stored by 3574 ** the pseudo-table. 3575 */ 3576 case OP_OpenPseudo: { 3577 VdbeCursor *pCx; 3578 3579 assert( pOp->p1>=0 ); 3580 assert( pOp->p3>=0 ); 3581 pCx = allocateCursor(p, pOp->p1, pOp->p3, -1, CURTYPE_PSEUDO); 3582 if( pCx==0 ) goto no_mem; 3583 pCx->nullRow = 1; 3584 pCx->uc.pseudoTableReg = pOp->p2; 3585 pCx->isTable = 1; 3586 assert( pOp->p5==0 ); 3587 break; 3588 } 3589 3590 /* Opcode: Close P1 * * * * 3591 ** 3592 ** Close a cursor previously opened as P1. If P1 is not 3593 ** currently open, this instruction is a no-op. 3594 */ 3595 case OP_Close: { 3596 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 3597 sqlite3VdbeFreeCursor(p, p->apCsr[pOp->p1]); 3598 p->apCsr[pOp->p1] = 0; 3599 break; 3600 } 3601 3602 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_USED_MASK 3603 /* Opcode: ColumnsUsed P1 * * P4 * 3604 ** 3605 ** This opcode (which only exists if SQLite was compiled with 3606 ** SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_USED_MASK) identifies which columns of the 3607 ** table or index for cursor P1 are used. P4 is a 64-bit integer 3608 ** (P4_INT64) in which the first 63 bits are one for each of the 3609 ** first 63 columns of the table or index that are actually used 3610 ** by the cursor. The high-order bit is set if any column after 3611 ** the 64th is used. 3612 */ 3613 case OP_ColumnsUsed: { 3614 VdbeCursor *pC; 3615 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 3616 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 3617 pC->maskUsed = *(u64*)pOp->p4.pI64; 3618 break; 3619 } 3620 #endif 3621 3622 /* Opcode: SeekGE P1 P2 P3 P4 * 3623 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] 3624 ** 3625 ** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys), 3626 ** use the value in register P3 as the key. If cursor P1 refers 3627 ** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers 3628 ** that are used as an unpacked index key. 3629 ** 3630 ** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the smallest entry that 3631 ** is greater than or equal to the key value. If there are no records 3632 ** greater than or equal to the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2. 3633 ** 3634 ** If the cursor P1 was opened using the OPFLAG_SEEKEQ flag, then this 3635 ** opcode will always land on a record that equally equals the key, or 3636 ** else jump immediately to P2. When the cursor is OPFLAG_SEEKEQ, this 3637 ** opcode must be followed by an IdxLE opcode with the same arguments. 3638 ** The IdxLE opcode will be skipped if this opcode succeeds, but the 3639 ** IdxLE opcode will be used on subsequent loop iterations. 3640 ** 3641 ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in forward order, 3642 ** from the beginning toward the end. In other words, the cursor is 3643 ** configured to use Next, not Prev. 3644 ** 3645 ** See also: Found, NotFound, SeekLt, SeekGt, SeekLe 3646 */ 3647 /* Opcode: SeekGT P1 P2 P3 P4 * 3648 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] 3649 ** 3650 ** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys), 3651 ** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers 3652 ** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers 3653 ** that are used as an unpacked index key. 3654 ** 3655 ** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the smallest entry that 3656 ** is greater than the key value. If there are no records greater than 3657 ** the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2. 3658 ** 3659 ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in forward order, 3660 ** from the beginning toward the end. In other words, the cursor is 3661 ** configured to use Next, not Prev. 3662 ** 3663 ** See also: Found, NotFound, SeekLt, SeekGe, SeekLe 3664 */ 3665 /* Opcode: SeekLT P1 P2 P3 P4 * 3666 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] 3667 ** 3668 ** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys), 3669 ** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers 3670 ** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers 3671 ** that are used as an unpacked index key. 3672 ** 3673 ** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the largest entry that 3674 ** is less than the key value. If there are no records less than 3675 ** the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2. 3676 ** 3677 ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in reverse order, 3678 ** from the end toward the beginning. In other words, the cursor is 3679 ** configured to use Prev, not Next. 3680 ** 3681 ** See also: Found, NotFound, SeekGt, SeekGe, SeekLe 3682 */ 3683 /* Opcode: SeekLE P1 P2 P3 P4 * 3684 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] 3685 ** 3686 ** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys), 3687 ** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers 3688 ** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers 3689 ** that are used as an unpacked index key. 3690 ** 3691 ** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the largest entry that 3692 ** is less than or equal to the key value. If there are no records 3693 ** less than or equal to the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2. 3694 ** 3695 ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in reverse order, 3696 ** from the end toward the beginning. In other words, the cursor is 3697 ** configured to use Prev, not Next. 3698 ** 3699 ** If the cursor P1 was opened using the OPFLAG_SEEKEQ flag, then this 3700 ** opcode will always land on a record that equally equals the key, or 3701 ** else jump immediately to P2. When the cursor is OPFLAG_SEEKEQ, this 3702 ** opcode must be followed by an IdxGE opcode with the same arguments. 3703 ** The IdxGE opcode will be skipped if this opcode succeeds, but the 3704 ** IdxGE opcode will be used on subsequent loop iterations. 3705 ** 3706 ** See also: Found, NotFound, SeekGt, SeekGe, SeekLt 3707 */ 3708 case OP_SeekLT: /* jump, in3 */ 3709 case OP_SeekLE: /* jump, in3 */ 3710 case OP_SeekGE: /* jump, in3 */ 3711 case OP_SeekGT: { /* jump, in3 */ 3712 int res; /* Comparison result */ 3713 int oc; /* Opcode */ 3714 VdbeCursor *pC; /* The cursor to seek */ 3715 UnpackedRecord r; /* The key to seek for */ 3716 int nField; /* Number of columns or fields in the key */ 3717 i64 iKey; /* The rowid we are to seek to */ 3718 int eqOnly; /* Only interested in == results */ 3719 3720 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 3721 assert( pOp->p2!=0 ); 3722 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 3723 assert( pC!=0 ); 3724 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 3725 assert( OP_SeekLE == OP_SeekLT+1 ); 3726 assert( OP_SeekGE == OP_SeekLT+2 ); 3727 assert( OP_SeekGT == OP_SeekLT+3 ); 3728 assert( pC->isOrdered ); 3729 assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 ); 3730 oc = pOp->opcode; 3731 eqOnly = 0; 3732 pC->nullRow = 0; 3733 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 3734 pC->seekOp = pOp->opcode; 3735 #endif 3736 3737 if( pC->isTable ){ 3738 /* The BTREE_SEEK_EQ flag is only set on index cursors */ 3739 assert( sqlite3BtreeCursorHasHint(pC->uc.pCursor, BTREE_SEEK_EQ)==0 ); 3740 3741 /* The input value in P3 might be of any type: integer, real, string, 3742 ** blob, or NULL. But it needs to be an integer before we can do 3743 ** the seek, so convert it. */ 3744 pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 3745 if( (pIn3->flags & (MEM_Int|MEM_Real|MEM_Str))==MEM_Str ){ 3746 applyNumericAffinity(pIn3, 0); 3747 } 3748 iKey = sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pIn3); 3749 3750 /* If the P3 value could not be converted into an integer without 3751 ** loss of information, then special processing is required... */ 3752 if( (pIn3->flags & MEM_Int)==0 ){ 3753 if( (pIn3->flags & MEM_Real)==0 ){ 3754 /* If the P3 value cannot be converted into any kind of a number, 3755 ** then the seek is not possible, so jump to P2 */ 3756 VdbeBranchTaken(1,2); goto jump_to_p2; 3757 break; 3758 } 3759 3760 /* If the approximation iKey is larger than the actual real search 3761 ** term, substitute >= for > and < for <=. e.g. if the search term 3762 ** is 4.9 and the integer approximation 5: 3763 ** 3764 ** (x > 4.9) -> (x >= 5) 3765 ** (x <= 4.9) -> (x < 5) 3766 */ 3767 if( pIn3->u.r<(double)iKey ){ 3768 assert( OP_SeekGE==(OP_SeekGT-1) ); 3769 assert( OP_SeekLT==(OP_SeekLE-1) ); 3770 assert( (OP_SeekLE & 0x0001)==(OP_SeekGT & 0x0001) ); 3771 if( (oc & 0x0001)==(OP_SeekGT & 0x0001) ) oc--; 3772 } 3773 3774 /* If the approximation iKey is smaller than the actual real search 3775 ** term, substitute <= for < and > for >=. */ 3776 else if( pIn3->u.r>(double)iKey ){ 3777 assert( OP_SeekLE==(OP_SeekLT+1) ); 3778 assert( OP_SeekGT==(OP_SeekGE+1) ); 3779 assert( (OP_SeekLT & 0x0001)==(OP_SeekGE & 0x0001) ); 3780 if( (oc & 0x0001)==(OP_SeekLT & 0x0001) ) oc++; 3781 } 3782 } 3783 rc = sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked(pC->uc.pCursor, 0, (u64)iKey, 0, &res); 3784 pC->movetoTarget = iKey; /* Used by OP_Delete */ 3785 if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ 3786 goto abort_due_to_error; 3787 } 3788 }else{ 3789 /* For a cursor with the BTREE_SEEK_EQ hint, only the OP_SeekGE and 3790 ** OP_SeekLE opcodes are allowed, and these must be immediately followed 3791 ** by an OP_IdxGT or OP_IdxLT opcode, respectively, with the same key. 3792 */ 3793 if( sqlite3BtreeCursorHasHint(pC->uc.pCursor, BTREE_SEEK_EQ) ){ 3794 eqOnly = 1; 3795 assert( pOp->opcode==OP_SeekGE || pOp->opcode==OP_SeekLE ); 3796 assert( pOp[1].opcode==OP_IdxLT || pOp[1].opcode==OP_IdxGT ); 3797 assert( pOp[1].p1==pOp[0].p1 ); 3798 assert( pOp[1].p2==pOp[0].p2 ); 3799 assert( pOp[1].p3==pOp[0].p3 ); 3800 assert( pOp[1].p4.i==pOp[0].p4.i ); 3801 } 3802 3803 nField = pOp->p4.i; 3804 assert( pOp->p4type==P4_INT32 ); 3805 assert( nField>0 ); 3806 r.pKeyInfo = pC->pKeyInfo; 3807 r.nField = (u16)nField; 3808 3809 /* The next line of code computes as follows, only faster: 3810 ** if( oc==OP_SeekGT || oc==OP_SeekLE ){ 3811 ** r.default_rc = -1; 3812 ** }else{ 3813 ** r.default_rc = +1; 3814 ** } 3815 */ 3816 r.default_rc = ((1 & (oc - OP_SeekLT)) ? -1 : +1); 3817 assert( oc!=OP_SeekGT || r.default_rc==-1 ); 3818 assert( oc!=OP_SeekLE || r.default_rc==-1 ); 3819 assert( oc!=OP_SeekGE || r.default_rc==+1 ); 3820 assert( oc!=OP_SeekLT || r.default_rc==+1 ); 3821 3822 r.aMem = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 3823 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 3824 { int i; for(i=0; i<r.nField; i++) assert( memIsValid(&r.aMem[i]) ); } 3825 #endif 3826 ExpandBlob(r.aMem); 3827 r.eqSeen = 0; 3828 rc = sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked(pC->uc.pCursor, &r, 0, 0, &res); 3829 if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ 3830 goto abort_due_to_error; 3831 } 3832 if( eqOnly && r.eqSeen==0 ){ 3833 assert( res!=0 ); 3834 goto seek_not_found; 3835 } 3836 } 3837 pC->deferredMoveto = 0; 3838 pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; 3839 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST 3840 sqlite3_search_count++; 3841 #endif 3842 if( oc>=OP_SeekGE ){ assert( oc==OP_SeekGE || oc==OP_SeekGT ); 3843 if( res<0 || (res==0 && oc==OP_SeekGT) ){ 3844 res = 0; 3845 rc = sqlite3BtreeNext(pC->uc.pCursor, &res); 3846 if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto abort_due_to_error; 3847 }else{ 3848 res = 0; 3849 } 3850 }else{ 3851 assert( oc==OP_SeekLT || oc==OP_SeekLE ); 3852 if( res>0 || (res==0 && oc==OP_SeekLT) ){ 3853 res = 0; 3854 rc = sqlite3BtreePrevious(pC->uc.pCursor, &res); 3855 if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto abort_due_to_error; 3856 }else{ 3857 /* res might be negative because the table is empty. Check to 3858 ** see if this is the case. 3859 */ 3860 res = sqlite3BtreeEof(pC->uc.pCursor); 3861 } 3862 } 3863 seek_not_found: 3864 assert( pOp->p2>0 ); 3865 VdbeBranchTaken(res!=0,2); 3866 if( res ){ 3867 goto jump_to_p2; 3868 }else if( eqOnly ){ 3869 assert( pOp[1].opcode==OP_IdxLT || pOp[1].opcode==OP_IdxGT ); 3870 pOp++; /* Skip the OP_IdxLt or OP_IdxGT that follows */ 3871 } 3872 break; 3873 } 3874 3875 3876 /* Opcode: Found P1 P2 P3 P4 * 3877 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] 3878 ** 3879 ** If P4==0 then register P3 holds a blob constructed by MakeRecord. If 3880 ** P4>0 then register P3 is the first of P4 registers that form an unpacked 3881 ** record. 3882 ** 3883 ** Cursor P1 is on an index btree. If the record identified by P3 and P4 3884 ** is a prefix of any entry in P1 then a jump is made to P2 and 3885 ** P1 is left pointing at the matching entry. 3886 ** 3887 ** This operation leaves the cursor in a state where it can be 3888 ** advanced in the forward direction. The Next instruction will work, 3889 ** but not the Prev instruction. 3890 ** 3891 ** See also: NotFound, NoConflict, NotExists. SeekGe 3892 */ 3893 /* Opcode: NotFound P1 P2 P3 P4 * 3894 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] 3895 ** 3896 ** If P4==0 then register P3 holds a blob constructed by MakeRecord. If 3897 ** P4>0 then register P3 is the first of P4 registers that form an unpacked 3898 ** record. 3899 ** 3900 ** Cursor P1 is on an index btree. If the record identified by P3 and P4 3901 ** is not the prefix of any entry in P1 then a jump is made to P2. If P1 3902 ** does contain an entry whose prefix matches the P3/P4 record then control 3903 ** falls through to the next instruction and P1 is left pointing at the 3904 ** matching entry. 3905 ** 3906 ** This operation leaves the cursor in a state where it cannot be 3907 ** advanced in either direction. In other words, the Next and Prev 3908 ** opcodes do not work after this operation. 3909 ** 3910 ** See also: Found, NotExists, NoConflict 3911 */ 3912 /* Opcode: NoConflict P1 P2 P3 P4 * 3913 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] 3914 ** 3915 ** If P4==0 then register P3 holds a blob constructed by MakeRecord. If 3916 ** P4>0 then register P3 is the first of P4 registers that form an unpacked 3917 ** record. 3918 ** 3919 ** Cursor P1 is on an index btree. If the record identified by P3 and P4 3920 ** contains any NULL value, jump immediately to P2. If all terms of the 3921 ** record are not-NULL then a check is done to determine if any row in the 3922 ** P1 index btree has a matching key prefix. If there are no matches, jump 3923 ** immediately to P2. If there is a match, fall through and leave the P1 3924 ** cursor pointing to the matching row. 3925 ** 3926 ** This opcode is similar to OP_NotFound with the exceptions that the 3927 ** branch is always taken if any part of the search key input is NULL. 3928 ** 3929 ** This operation leaves the cursor in a state where it cannot be 3930 ** advanced in either direction. In other words, the Next and Prev 3931 ** opcodes do not work after this operation. 3932 ** 3933 ** See also: NotFound, Found, NotExists 3934 */ 3935 case OP_NoConflict: /* jump, in3 */ 3936 case OP_NotFound: /* jump, in3 */ 3937 case OP_Found: { /* jump, in3 */ 3938 int alreadyExists; 3939 int takeJump; 3940 int ii; 3941 VdbeCursor *pC; 3942 int res; 3943 char *pFree; 3944 UnpackedRecord *pIdxKey; 3945 UnpackedRecord r; 3946 char aTempRec[ROUND8(sizeof(UnpackedRecord)) + sizeof(Mem)*4 + 7]; 3947 3948 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST 3949 if( pOp->opcode!=OP_NoConflict ) sqlite3_found_count++; 3950 #endif 3951 3952 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 3953 assert( pOp->p4type==P4_INT32 ); 3954 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 3955 assert( pC!=0 ); 3956 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 3957 pC->seekOp = pOp->opcode; 3958 #endif 3959 pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 3960 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 3961 assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 ); 3962 assert( pC->isTable==0 ); 3963 pFree = 0; 3964 if( pOp->p4.i>0 ){ 3965 r.pKeyInfo = pC->pKeyInfo; 3966 r.nField = (u16)pOp->p4.i; 3967 r.aMem = pIn3; 3968 for(ii=0; ii<r.nField; ii++){ 3969 assert( memIsValid(&r.aMem[ii]) ); 3970 ExpandBlob(&r.aMem[ii]); 3971 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 3972 if( ii ) REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3+ii, &r.aMem[ii]); 3973 #endif 3974 } 3975 pIdxKey = &r; 3976 }else{ 3977 pIdxKey = sqlite3VdbeAllocUnpackedRecord( 3978 pC->pKeyInfo, aTempRec, sizeof(aTempRec), &pFree 3979 ); 3980 if( pIdxKey==0 ) goto no_mem; 3981 assert( pIn3->flags & MEM_Blob ); 3982 ExpandBlob(pIn3); 3983 sqlite3VdbeRecordUnpack(pC->pKeyInfo, pIn3->n, pIn3->z, pIdxKey); 3984 } 3985 pIdxKey->default_rc = 0; 3986 takeJump = 0; 3987 if( pOp->opcode==OP_NoConflict ){ 3988 /* For the OP_NoConflict opcode, take the jump if any of the 3989 ** input fields are NULL, since any key with a NULL will not 3990 ** conflict */ 3991 for(ii=0; ii<pIdxKey->nField; ii++){ 3992 if( pIdxKey->aMem[ii].flags & MEM_Null ){ 3993 takeJump = 1; 3994 break; 3995 } 3996 } 3997 } 3998 rc = sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked(pC->uc.pCursor, pIdxKey, 0, 0, &res); 3999 sqlite3DbFree(db, pFree); 4000 if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ 4001 goto abort_due_to_error; 4002 } 4003 pC->seekResult = res; 4004 alreadyExists = (res==0); 4005 pC->nullRow = 1-alreadyExists; 4006 pC->deferredMoveto = 0; 4007 pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; 4008 if( pOp->opcode==OP_Found ){ 4009 VdbeBranchTaken(alreadyExists!=0,2); 4010 if( alreadyExists ) goto jump_to_p2; 4011 }else{ 4012 VdbeBranchTaken(takeJump||alreadyExists==0,2); 4013 if( takeJump || !alreadyExists ) goto jump_to_p2; 4014 } 4015 break; 4016 } 4017 4018 /* Opcode: SeekRowid P1 P2 P3 * * 4019 ** Synopsis: intkey=r[P3] 4020 ** 4021 ** P1 is the index of a cursor open on an SQL table btree (with integer 4022 ** keys). If register P3 does not contain an integer or if P1 does not 4023 ** contain a record with rowid P3 then jump immediately to P2. 4024 ** Or, if P2 is 0, raise an SQLITE_CORRUPT error. If P1 does contain 4025 ** a record with rowid P3 then 4026 ** leave the cursor pointing at that record and fall through to the next 4027 ** instruction. 4028 ** 4029 ** The OP_NotExists opcode performs the same operation, but with OP_NotExists 4030 ** the P3 register must be guaranteed to contain an integer value. With this 4031 ** opcode, register P3 might not contain an integer. 4032 ** 4033 ** The OP_NotFound opcode performs the same operation on index btrees 4034 ** (with arbitrary multi-value keys). 4035 ** 4036 ** This opcode leaves the cursor in a state where it cannot be advanced 4037 ** in either direction. In other words, the Next and Prev opcodes will 4038 ** not work following this opcode. 4039 ** 4040 ** See also: Found, NotFound, NoConflict, SeekRowid 4041 */ 4042 /* Opcode: NotExists P1 P2 P3 * * 4043 ** Synopsis: intkey=r[P3] 4044 ** 4045 ** P1 is the index of a cursor open on an SQL table btree (with integer 4046 ** keys). P3 is an integer rowid. If P1 does not contain a record with 4047 ** rowid P3 then jump immediately to P2. Or, if P2 is 0, raise an 4048 ** SQLITE_CORRUPT error. If P1 does contain a record with rowid P3 then 4049 ** leave the cursor pointing at that record and fall through to the next 4050 ** instruction. 4051 ** 4052 ** The OP_SeekRowid opcode performs the same operation but also allows the 4053 ** P3 register to contain a non-integer value, in which case the jump is 4054 ** always taken. This opcode requires that P3 always contain an integer. 4055 ** 4056 ** The OP_NotFound opcode performs the same operation on index btrees 4057 ** (with arbitrary multi-value keys). 4058 ** 4059 ** This opcode leaves the cursor in a state where it cannot be advanced 4060 ** in either direction. In other words, the Next and Prev opcodes will 4061 ** not work following this opcode. 4062 ** 4063 ** See also: Found, NotFound, NoConflict, SeekRowid 4064 */ 4065 case OP_SeekRowid: { /* jump, in3 */ 4066 VdbeCursor *pC; 4067 BtCursor *pCrsr; 4068 int res; 4069 u64 iKey; 4070 4071 pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 4072 if( (pIn3->flags & MEM_Int)==0 ){ 4073 applyAffinity(pIn3, SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC, encoding); 4074 if( (pIn3->flags & MEM_Int)==0 ) goto jump_to_p2; 4075 } 4076 /* Fall through into OP_NotExists */ 4077 case OP_NotExists: /* jump, in3 */ 4078 pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 4079 assert( pIn3->flags & MEM_Int ); 4080 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 4081 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 4082 assert( pC!=0 ); 4083 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 4084 pC->seekOp = 0; 4085 #endif 4086 assert( pC->isTable ); 4087 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 4088 pCrsr = pC->uc.pCursor; 4089 assert( pCrsr!=0 ); 4090 res = 0; 4091 iKey = pIn3->u.i; 4092 rc = sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked(pCrsr, 0, iKey, 0, &res); 4093 assert( rc==SQLITE_OK || res==0 ); 4094 pC->movetoTarget = iKey; /* Used by OP_Delete */ 4095 pC->nullRow = 0; 4096 pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; 4097 pC->deferredMoveto = 0; 4098 VdbeBranchTaken(res!=0,2); 4099 pC->seekResult = res; 4100 if( res!=0 ){ 4101 assert( rc==SQLITE_OK ); 4102 if( pOp->p2==0 ){ 4103 rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; 4104 }else{ 4105 goto jump_to_p2; 4106 } 4107 } 4108 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 4109 break; 4110 } 4111 4112 /* Opcode: Sequence P1 P2 * * * 4113 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=cursor[P1].ctr++ 4114 ** 4115 ** Find the next available sequence number for cursor P1. 4116 ** Write the sequence number into register P2. 4117 ** The sequence number on the cursor is incremented after this 4118 ** instruction. 4119 */ 4120 case OP_Sequence: { /* out2 */ 4121 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 4122 assert( p->apCsr[pOp->p1]!=0 ); 4123 assert( p->apCsr[pOp->p1]->eCurType!=CURTYPE_VTAB ); 4124 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 4125 pOut->u.i = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]->seqCount++; 4126 break; 4127 } 4128 4129 4130 /* Opcode: NewRowid P1 P2 P3 * * 4131 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=rowid 4132 ** 4133 ** Get a new integer record number (a.k.a "rowid") used as the key to a table. 4134 ** The record number is not previously used as a key in the database 4135 ** table that cursor P1 points to. The new record number is written 4136 ** written to register P2. 4137 ** 4138 ** If P3>0 then P3 is a register in the root frame of this VDBE that holds 4139 ** the largest previously generated record number. No new record numbers are 4140 ** allowed to be less than this value. When this value reaches its maximum, 4141 ** an SQLITE_FULL error is generated. The P3 register is updated with the ' 4142 ** generated record number. This P3 mechanism is used to help implement the 4143 ** AUTOINCREMENT feature. 4144 */ 4145 case OP_NewRowid: { /* out2 */ 4146 i64 v; /* The new rowid */ 4147 VdbeCursor *pC; /* Cursor of table to get the new rowid */ 4148 int res; /* Result of an sqlite3BtreeLast() */ 4149 int cnt; /* Counter to limit the number of searches */ 4150 Mem *pMem; /* Register holding largest rowid for AUTOINCREMENT */ 4151 VdbeFrame *pFrame; /* Root frame of VDBE */ 4152 4153 v = 0; 4154 res = 0; 4155 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 4156 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 4157 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 4158 assert( pC!=0 ); 4159 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 4160 assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 ); 4161 { 4162 /* The next rowid or record number (different terms for the same 4163 ** thing) is obtained in a two-step algorithm. 4164 ** 4165 ** First we attempt to find the largest existing rowid and add one 4166 ** to that. But if the largest existing rowid is already the maximum 4167 ** positive integer, we have to fall through to the second 4168 ** probabilistic algorithm 4169 ** 4170 ** The second algorithm is to select a rowid at random and see if 4171 ** it already exists in the table. If it does not exist, we have 4172 ** succeeded. If the random rowid does exist, we select a new one 4173 ** and try again, up to 100 times. 4174 */ 4175 assert( pC->isTable ); 4176 4177 #ifdef SQLITE_32BIT_ROWID 4178 # define MAX_ROWID 0x7fffffff 4179 #else 4180 /* Some compilers complain about constants of the form 0x7fffffffffffffff. 4181 ** Others complain about 0x7ffffffffffffffffLL. The following macro seems 4182 ** to provide the constant while making all compilers happy. 4183 */ 4184 # define MAX_ROWID (i64)( (((u64)0x7fffffff)<<32) | (u64)0xffffffff ) 4185 #endif 4186 4187 if( !pC->useRandomRowid ){ 4188 rc = sqlite3BtreeLast(pC->uc.pCursor, &res); 4189 if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ 4190 goto abort_due_to_error; 4191 } 4192 if( res ){ 4193 v = 1; /* IMP: R-61914-48074 */ 4194 }else{ 4195 assert( sqlite3BtreeCursorIsValid(pC->uc.pCursor) ); 4196 v = sqlite3BtreeIntegerKey(pC->uc.pCursor); 4197 if( v>=MAX_ROWID ){ 4198 pC->useRandomRowid = 1; 4199 }else{ 4200 v++; /* IMP: R-29538-34987 */ 4201 } 4202 } 4203 } 4204 4205 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOINCREMENT 4206 if( pOp->p3 ){ 4207 /* Assert that P3 is a valid memory cell. */ 4208 assert( pOp->p3>0 ); 4209 if( p->pFrame ){ 4210 for(pFrame=p->pFrame; pFrame->pParent; pFrame=pFrame->pParent); 4211 /* Assert that P3 is a valid memory cell. */ 4212 assert( pOp->p3<=pFrame->nMem ); 4213 pMem = &pFrame->aMem[pOp->p3]; 4214 }else{ 4215 /* Assert that P3 is a valid memory cell. */ 4216 assert( pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); 4217 pMem = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 4218 memAboutToChange(p, pMem); 4219 } 4220 assert( memIsValid(pMem) ); 4221 4222 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, pMem); 4223 sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pMem); 4224 assert( (pMem->flags & MEM_Int)!=0 ); /* mem(P3) holds an integer */ 4225 if( pMem->u.i==MAX_ROWID || pC->useRandomRowid ){ 4226 rc = SQLITE_FULL; /* IMP: R-12275-61338 */ 4227 goto abort_due_to_error; 4228 } 4229 if( v<pMem->u.i+1 ){ 4230 v = pMem->u.i + 1; 4231 } 4232 pMem->u.i = v; 4233 } 4234 #endif 4235 if( pC->useRandomRowid ){ 4236 /* IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-07677-41881 If the largest ROWID is equal to the 4237 ** largest possible integer (9223372036854775807) then the database 4238 ** engine starts picking positive candidate ROWIDs at random until 4239 ** it finds one that is not previously used. */ 4240 assert( pOp->p3==0 ); /* We cannot be in random rowid mode if this is 4241 ** an AUTOINCREMENT table. */ 4242 cnt = 0; 4243 do{ 4244 sqlite3_randomness(sizeof(v), &v); 4245 v &= (MAX_ROWID>>1); v++; /* Ensure that v is greater than zero */ 4246 }while( ((rc = sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked(pC->uc.pCursor, 0, (u64)v, 4247 0, &res))==SQLITE_OK) 4248 && (res==0) 4249 && (++cnt<100)); 4250 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 4251 if( res==0 ){ 4252 rc = SQLITE_FULL; /* IMP: R-38219-53002 */ 4253 goto abort_due_to_error; 4254 } 4255 assert( v>0 ); /* EV: R-40812-03570 */ 4256 } 4257 pC->deferredMoveto = 0; 4258 pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; 4259 } 4260 pOut->u.i = v; 4261 break; 4262 } 4263 4264 /* Opcode: Insert P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 4265 ** Synopsis: intkey=r[P3] data=r[P2] 4266 ** 4267 ** Write an entry into the table of cursor P1. A new entry is 4268 ** created if it doesn't already exist or the data for an existing 4269 ** entry is overwritten. The data is the value MEM_Blob stored in register 4270 ** number P2. The key is stored in register P3. The key must 4271 ** be a MEM_Int. 4272 ** 4273 ** If the OPFLAG_NCHANGE flag of P5 is set, then the row change count is 4274 ** incremented (otherwise not). If the OPFLAG_LASTROWID flag of P5 is set, 4275 ** then rowid is stored for subsequent return by the 4276 ** sqlite3_last_insert_rowid() function (otherwise it is unmodified). 4277 ** 4278 ** If the OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT flag of P5 is set and if the result of 4279 ** the last seek operation (OP_NotExists or OP_SeekRowid) was a success, 4280 ** then this 4281 ** operation will not attempt to find the appropriate row before doing 4282 ** the insert but will instead overwrite the row that the cursor is 4283 ** currently pointing to. Presumably, the prior OP_NotExists or 4284 ** OP_SeekRowid opcode 4285 ** has already positioned the cursor correctly. This is an optimization 4286 ** that boosts performance by avoiding redundant seeks. 4287 ** 4288 ** If the OPFLAG_ISUPDATE flag is set, then this opcode is part of an 4289 ** UPDATE operation. Otherwise (if the flag is clear) then this opcode 4290 ** is part of an INSERT operation. The difference is only important to 4291 ** the update hook. 4292 ** 4293 ** Parameter P4 may point to a Table structure, or may be NULL. If it is 4294 ** not NULL, then the update-hook (sqlite3.xUpdateCallback) is invoked 4295 ** following a successful insert. 4296 ** 4297 ** (WARNING/TODO: If P1 is a pseudo-cursor and P2 is dynamically 4298 ** allocated, then ownership of P2 is transferred to the pseudo-cursor 4299 ** and register P2 becomes ephemeral. If the cursor is changed, the 4300 ** value of register P2 will then change. Make sure this does not 4301 ** cause any problems.) 4302 ** 4303 ** This instruction only works on tables. The equivalent instruction 4304 ** for indices is OP_IdxInsert. 4305 */ 4306 /* Opcode: InsertInt P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 4307 ** Synopsis: intkey=P3 data=r[P2] 4308 ** 4309 ** This works exactly like OP_Insert except that the key is the 4310 ** integer value P3, not the value of the integer stored in register P3. 4311 */ 4312 case OP_Insert: 4313 case OP_InsertInt: { 4314 Mem *pData; /* MEM cell holding data for the record to be inserted */ 4315 Mem *pKey; /* MEM cell holding key for the record */ 4316 VdbeCursor *pC; /* Cursor to table into which insert is written */ 4317 int seekResult; /* Result of prior seek or 0 if no USESEEKRESULT flag */ 4318 const char *zDb; /* database name - used by the update hook */ 4319 Table *pTab; /* Table structure - used by update and pre-update hooks */ 4320 int op; /* Opcode for update hook: SQLITE_UPDATE or SQLITE_INSERT */ 4321 BtreePayload x; /* Payload to be inserted */ 4322 4323 op = 0; 4324 pData = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 4325 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 4326 assert( memIsValid(pData) ); 4327 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 4328 assert( pC!=0 ); 4329 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 4330 assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 ); 4331 assert( pC->isTable ); 4332 assert( pOp->p4type==P4_TABLE || pOp->p4type>=P4_STATIC ); 4333 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p2, pData); 4334 4335 if( pOp->opcode==OP_Insert ){ 4336 pKey = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 4337 assert( pKey->flags & MEM_Int ); 4338 assert( memIsValid(pKey) ); 4339 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, pKey); 4340 x.nKey = pKey->u.i; 4341 }else{ 4342 assert( pOp->opcode==OP_InsertInt ); 4343 x.nKey = pOp->p3; 4344 } 4345 4346 if( pOp->p4type==P4_TABLE && HAS_UPDATE_HOOK(db) ){ 4347 assert( pC->isTable ); 4348 assert( pC->iDb>=0 ); 4349 zDb = db->aDb[pC->iDb].zName; 4350 pTab = pOp->p4.pTab; 4351 assert( HasRowid(pTab) ); 4352 op = ((pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_ISUPDATE) ? SQLITE_UPDATE : SQLITE_INSERT); 4353 }else{ 4354 pTab = 0; /* Not needed. Silence a comiler warning. */ 4355 zDb = 0; /* Not needed. Silence a compiler warning. */ 4356 } 4357 4358 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK 4359 /* Invoke the pre-update hook, if any */ 4360 if( db->xPreUpdateCallback 4361 && pOp->p4type==P4_TABLE 4362 && !(pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_ISUPDATE) 4363 ){ 4364 sqlite3VdbePreUpdateHook(p, pC, SQLITE_INSERT, zDb, pTab, x.nKey, pOp->p2); 4365 } 4366 #endif 4367 4368 if( pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_NCHANGE ) p->nChange++; 4369 if( pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_LASTROWID ) db->lastRowid = lastRowid = x.nKey; 4370 if( pData->flags & MEM_Null ){ 4371 x.pData = 0; 4372 x.nData = 0; 4373 }else{ 4374 assert( pData->flags & (MEM_Blob|MEM_Str) ); 4375 x.pData = pData->z; 4376 x.nData = pData->n; 4377 } 4378 seekResult = ((pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT) ? pC->seekResult : 0); 4379 if( pData->flags & MEM_Zero ){ 4380 x.nZero = pData->u.nZero; 4381 }else{ 4382 x.nZero = 0; 4383 } 4384 x.pKey = 0; 4385 rc = sqlite3BtreeInsert(pC->uc.pCursor, &x, 4386 (pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_APPEND)!=0, seekResult 4387 ); 4388 pC->deferredMoveto = 0; 4389 pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; 4390 4391 /* Invoke the update-hook if required. */ 4392 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 4393 if( db->xUpdateCallback && op ){ 4394 db->xUpdateCallback(db->pUpdateArg, op, zDb, pTab->zName, x.nKey); 4395 } 4396 break; 4397 } 4398 4399 /* Opcode: Delete P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 4400 ** 4401 ** Delete the record at which the P1 cursor is currently pointing. 4402 ** 4403 ** If the OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION bit of the P5 parameter is set, then 4404 ** the cursor will be left pointing at either the next or the previous 4405 ** record in the table. If it is left pointing at the next record, then 4406 ** the next Next instruction will be a no-op. As a result, in this case 4407 ** it is ok to delete a record from within a Next loop. If 4408 ** OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION bit of P5 is clear, then the cursor will be 4409 ** left in an undefined state. 4410 ** 4411 ** If the OPFLAG_AUXDELETE bit is set on P5, that indicates that this 4412 ** delete one of several associated with deleting a table row and all its 4413 ** associated index entries. Exactly one of those deletes is the "primary" 4414 ** delete. The others are all on OPFLAG_FORDELETE cursors or else are 4415 ** marked with the AUXDELETE flag. 4416 ** 4417 ** If the OPFLAG_NCHANGE flag of P2 (NB: P2 not P5) is set, then the row 4418 ** change count is incremented (otherwise not). 4419 ** 4420 ** P1 must not be pseudo-table. It has to be a real table with 4421 ** multiple rows. 4422 ** 4423 ** If P4 is not NULL then it points to a Table struture. In this case either 4424 ** the update or pre-update hook, or both, may be invoked. The P1 cursor must 4425 ** have been positioned using OP_NotFound prior to invoking this opcode in 4426 ** this case. Specifically, if one is configured, the pre-update hook is 4427 ** invoked if P4 is not NULL. The update-hook is invoked if one is configured, 4428 ** P4 is not NULL, and the OPFLAG_NCHANGE flag is set in P2. 4429 ** 4430 ** If the OPFLAG_ISUPDATE flag is set in P2, then P3 contains the address 4431 ** of the memory cell that contains the value that the rowid of the row will 4432 ** be set to by the update. 4433 */ 4434 case OP_Delete: { 4435 VdbeCursor *pC; 4436 const char *zDb; 4437 Table *pTab; 4438 int opflags; 4439 4440 opflags = pOp->p2; 4441 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 4442 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 4443 assert( pC!=0 ); 4444 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 4445 assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 ); 4446 assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 ); 4447 4448 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 4449 if( pOp->p4type==P4_TABLE && HasRowid(pOp->p4.pTab) && pOp->p5==0 ){ 4450 /* If p5 is zero, the seek operation that positioned the cursor prior to 4451 ** OP_Delete will have also set the pC->movetoTarget field to the rowid of 4452 ** the row that is being deleted */ 4453 i64 iKey = sqlite3BtreeIntegerKey(pC->uc.pCursor); 4454 assert( pC->movetoTarget==iKey ); 4455 } 4456 #endif 4457 4458 /* If the update-hook or pre-update-hook will be invoked, set zDb to 4459 ** the name of the db to pass as to it. Also set local pTab to a copy 4460 ** of p4.pTab. Finally, if p5 is true, indicating that this cursor was 4461 ** last moved with OP_Next or OP_Prev, not Seek or NotFound, set 4462 ** VdbeCursor.movetoTarget to the current rowid. */ 4463 if( pOp->p4type==P4_TABLE && HAS_UPDATE_HOOK(db) ){ 4464 assert( pC->iDb>=0 ); 4465 assert( pOp->p4.pTab!=0 ); 4466 zDb = db->aDb[pC->iDb].zName; 4467 pTab = pOp->p4.pTab; 4468 if( (pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION)!=0 && pC->isTable ){ 4469 pC->movetoTarget = sqlite3BtreeIntegerKey(pC->uc.pCursor); 4470 } 4471 }else{ 4472 zDb = 0; /* Not needed. Silence a compiler warning. */ 4473 pTab = 0; /* Not needed. Silence a compiler warning. */ 4474 } 4475 4476 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK 4477 /* Invoke the pre-update-hook if required. */ 4478 if( db->xPreUpdateCallback && pOp->p4.pTab && HasRowid(pTab) ){ 4479 assert( !(opflags & OPFLAG_ISUPDATE) || (aMem[pOp->p3].flags & MEM_Int) ); 4480 sqlite3VdbePreUpdateHook(p, pC, 4481 (opflags & OPFLAG_ISUPDATE) ? SQLITE_UPDATE : SQLITE_DELETE, 4482 zDb, pTab, pC->movetoTarget, 4483 pOp->p3 4484 ); 4485 } 4486 if( opflags & OPFLAG_ISNOOP ) break; 4487 #endif 4488 4489 /* Only flags that can be set are SAVEPOISTION and AUXDELETE */ 4490 assert( (pOp->p5 & ~(OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION|OPFLAG_AUXDELETE))==0 ); 4491 assert( OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION==BTREE_SAVEPOSITION ); 4492 assert( OPFLAG_AUXDELETE==BTREE_AUXDELETE ); 4493 4494 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 4495 if( p->pFrame==0 ){ 4496 if( pC->isEphemeral==0 4497 && (pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_AUXDELETE)==0 4498 && (pC->wrFlag & OPFLAG_FORDELETE)==0 4499 ){ 4500 nExtraDelete++; 4501 } 4502 if( pOp->p2 & OPFLAG_NCHANGE ){ 4503 nExtraDelete--; 4504 } 4505 } 4506 #endif 4507 4508 rc = sqlite3BtreeDelete(pC->uc.pCursor, pOp->p5); 4509 pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; 4510 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 4511 4512 /* Invoke the update-hook if required. */ 4513 if( opflags & OPFLAG_NCHANGE ){ 4514 p->nChange++; 4515 if( db->xUpdateCallback && HasRowid(pTab) ){ 4516 db->xUpdateCallback(db->pUpdateArg, SQLITE_DELETE, zDb, pTab->zName, 4517 pC->movetoTarget); 4518 assert( pC->iDb>=0 ); 4519 } 4520 } 4521 4522 break; 4523 } 4524 /* Opcode: ResetCount * * * * * 4525 ** 4526 ** The value of the change counter is copied to the database handle 4527 ** change counter (returned by subsequent calls to sqlite3_changes()). 4528 ** Then the VMs internal change counter resets to 0. 4529 ** This is used by trigger programs. 4530 */ 4531 case OP_ResetCount: { 4532 sqlite3VdbeSetChanges(db, p->nChange); 4533 p->nChange = 0; 4534 break; 4535 } 4536 4537 /* Opcode: SorterCompare P1 P2 P3 P4 4538 ** Synopsis: if key(P1)!=trim(r[P3],P4) goto P2 4539 ** 4540 ** P1 is a sorter cursor. This instruction compares a prefix of the 4541 ** record blob in register P3 against a prefix of the entry that 4542 ** the sorter cursor currently points to. Only the first P4 fields 4543 ** of r[P3] and the sorter record are compared. 4544 ** 4545 ** If either P3 or the sorter contains a NULL in one of their significant 4546 ** fields (not counting the P4 fields at the end which are ignored) then 4547 ** the comparison is assumed to be equal. 4548 ** 4549 ** Fall through to next instruction if the two records compare equal to 4550 ** each other. Jump to P2 if they are different. 4551 */ 4552 case OP_SorterCompare: { 4553 VdbeCursor *pC; 4554 int res; 4555 int nKeyCol; 4556 4557 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 4558 assert( isSorter(pC) ); 4559 assert( pOp->p4type==P4_INT32 ); 4560 pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 4561 nKeyCol = pOp->p4.i; 4562 res = 0; 4563 rc = sqlite3VdbeSorterCompare(pC, pIn3, nKeyCol, &res); 4564 VdbeBranchTaken(res!=0,2); 4565 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 4566 if( res ) goto jump_to_p2; 4567 break; 4568 }; 4569 4570 /* Opcode: SorterData P1 P2 P3 * * 4571 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=data 4572 ** 4573 ** Write into register P2 the current sorter data for sorter cursor P1. 4574 ** Then clear the column header cache on cursor P3. 4575 ** 4576 ** This opcode is normally use to move a record out of the sorter and into 4577 ** a register that is the source for a pseudo-table cursor created using 4578 ** OpenPseudo. That pseudo-table cursor is the one that is identified by 4579 ** parameter P3. Clearing the P3 column cache as part of this opcode saves 4580 ** us from having to issue a separate NullRow instruction to clear that cache. 4581 */ 4582 case OP_SorterData: { 4583 VdbeCursor *pC; 4584 4585 pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 4586 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 4587 assert( isSorter(pC) ); 4588 rc = sqlite3VdbeSorterRowkey(pC, pOut); 4589 assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || (pOut->flags & MEM_Blob) ); 4590 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 4591 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 4592 p->apCsr[pOp->p3]->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; 4593 break; 4594 } 4595 4596 /* Opcode: RowData P1 P2 * * * 4597 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=data 4598 ** 4599 ** Write into register P2 the complete row data for cursor P1. 4600 ** There is no interpretation of the data. 4601 ** It is just copied onto the P2 register exactly as 4602 ** it is found in the database file. 4603 ** 4604 ** If the P1 cursor must be pointing to a valid row (not a NULL row) 4605 ** of a real table, not a pseudo-table. 4606 */ 4607 /* Opcode: RowKey P1 P2 * * * 4608 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=key 4609 ** 4610 ** Write into register P2 the complete row key for cursor P1. 4611 ** There is no interpretation of the data. 4612 ** The key is copied onto the P2 register exactly as 4613 ** it is found in the database file. 4614 ** 4615 ** If the P1 cursor must be pointing to a valid row (not a NULL row) 4616 ** of a real table, not a pseudo-table. 4617 */ 4618 case OP_RowKey: 4619 case OP_RowData: { 4620 VdbeCursor *pC; 4621 BtCursor *pCrsr; 4622 u32 n; 4623 4624 pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 4625 memAboutToChange(p, pOut); 4626 4627 /* Note that RowKey and RowData are really exactly the same instruction */ 4628 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 4629 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 4630 assert( pC!=0 ); 4631 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 4632 assert( isSorter(pC)==0 ); 4633 assert( pC->isTable || pOp->opcode!=OP_RowData ); 4634 assert( pC->isTable==0 || pOp->opcode==OP_RowData ); 4635 assert( pC->nullRow==0 ); 4636 assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 ); 4637 pCrsr = pC->uc.pCursor; 4638 4639 /* The OP_RowKey and OP_RowData opcodes always follow OP_NotExists or 4640 ** OP_SeekRowid or OP_Rewind/Op_Next with no intervening instructions 4641 ** that might invalidate the cursor. 4642 ** If this where not the case, on of the following assert()s 4643 ** would fail. Should this ever change (because of changes in the code 4644 ** generator) then the fix would be to insert a call to 4645 ** sqlite3VdbeCursorMoveto(). 4646 */ 4647 assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 ); 4648 assert( sqlite3BtreeCursorIsValid(pCrsr) ); 4649 #if 0 /* Not required due to the previous to assert() statements */ 4650 rc = sqlite3VdbeCursorMoveto(pC); 4651 if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto abort_due_to_error; 4652 #endif 4653 4654 n = sqlite3BtreePayloadSize(pCrsr); 4655 if( n>(u32)db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_LENGTH] ){ 4656 goto too_big; 4657 } 4658 testcase( n==0 ); 4659 if( sqlite3VdbeMemClearAndResize(pOut, MAX(n,32)) ){ 4660 goto no_mem; 4661 } 4662 pOut->n = n; 4663 MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Blob); 4664 if( pC->isTable==0 ){ 4665 rc = sqlite3BtreeKey(pCrsr, 0, n, pOut->z); 4666 }else{ 4667 rc = sqlite3BtreeData(pCrsr, 0, n, pOut->z); 4668 } 4669 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 4670 pOut->enc = SQLITE_UTF8; /* In case the blob is ever cast to text */ 4671 UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pOut); 4672 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p2, pOut); 4673 break; 4674 } 4675 4676 /* Opcode: Rowid P1 P2 * * * 4677 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=rowid 4678 ** 4679 ** Store in register P2 an integer which is the key of the table entry that 4680 ** P1 is currently point to. 4681 ** 4682 ** P1 can be either an ordinary table or a virtual table. There used to 4683 ** be a separate OP_VRowid opcode for use with virtual tables, but this 4684 ** one opcode now works for both table types. 4685 */ 4686 case OP_Rowid: { /* out2 */ 4687 VdbeCursor *pC; 4688 i64 v; 4689 sqlite3_vtab *pVtab; 4690 const sqlite3_module *pModule; 4691 4692 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 4693 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 4694 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 4695 assert( pC!=0 ); 4696 assert( pC->eCurType!=CURTYPE_PSEUDO || pC->nullRow ); 4697 if( pC->nullRow ){ 4698 pOut->flags = MEM_Null; 4699 break; 4700 }else if( pC->deferredMoveto ){ 4701 v = pC->movetoTarget; 4702 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE 4703 }else if( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_VTAB ){ 4704 assert( pC->uc.pVCur!=0 ); 4705 pVtab = pC->uc.pVCur->pVtab; 4706 pModule = pVtab->pModule; 4707 assert( pModule->xRowid ); 4708 rc = pModule->xRowid(pC->uc.pVCur, &v); 4709 sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(p, pVtab); 4710 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 4711 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ 4712 }else{ 4713 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 4714 assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 ); 4715 rc = sqlite3VdbeCursorRestore(pC); 4716 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 4717 if( pC->nullRow ){ 4718 pOut->flags = MEM_Null; 4719 break; 4720 } 4721 v = sqlite3BtreeIntegerKey(pC->uc.pCursor); 4722 } 4723 pOut->u.i = v; 4724 break; 4725 } 4726 4727 /* Opcode: NullRow P1 * * * * 4728 ** 4729 ** Move the cursor P1 to a null row. Any OP_Column operations 4730 ** that occur while the cursor is on the null row will always 4731 ** write a NULL. 4732 */ 4733 case OP_NullRow: { 4734 VdbeCursor *pC; 4735 4736 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 4737 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 4738 assert( pC!=0 ); 4739 pC->nullRow = 1; 4740 pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; 4741 if( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ){ 4742 assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 ); 4743 sqlite3BtreeClearCursor(pC->uc.pCursor); 4744 } 4745 break; 4746 } 4747 4748 /* Opcode: Last P1 P2 P3 * * 4749 ** 4750 ** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Prev instruction for P1 4751 ** will refer to the last entry in the database table or index. 4752 ** If the table or index is empty and P2>0, then jump immediately to P2. 4753 ** If P2 is 0 or if the table or index is not empty, fall through 4754 ** to the following instruction. 4755 ** 4756 ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in reverse order, 4757 ** from the end toward the beginning. In other words, the cursor is 4758 ** configured to use Prev, not Next. 4759 */ 4760 case OP_Last: { /* jump */ 4761 VdbeCursor *pC; 4762 BtCursor *pCrsr; 4763 int res; 4764 4765 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 4766 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 4767 assert( pC!=0 ); 4768 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 4769 pCrsr = pC->uc.pCursor; 4770 res = 0; 4771 assert( pCrsr!=0 ); 4772 rc = sqlite3BtreeLast(pCrsr, &res); 4773 pC->nullRow = (u8)res; 4774 pC->deferredMoveto = 0; 4775 pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; 4776 pC->seekResult = pOp->p3; 4777 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 4778 pC->seekOp = OP_Last; 4779 #endif 4780 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 4781 if( pOp->p2>0 ){ 4782 VdbeBranchTaken(res!=0,2); 4783 if( res ) goto jump_to_p2; 4784 } 4785 break; 4786 } 4787 4788 4789 /* Opcode: Sort P1 P2 * * * 4790 ** 4791 ** This opcode does exactly the same thing as OP_Rewind except that 4792 ** it increments an undocumented global variable used for testing. 4793 ** 4794 ** Sorting is accomplished by writing records into a sorting index, 4795 ** then rewinding that index and playing it back from beginning to 4796 ** end. We use the OP_Sort opcode instead of OP_Rewind to do the 4797 ** rewinding so that the global variable will be incremented and 4798 ** regression tests can determine whether or not the optimizer is 4799 ** correctly optimizing out sorts. 4800 */ 4801 case OP_SorterSort: /* jump */ 4802 case OP_Sort: { /* jump */ 4803 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST 4804 sqlite3_sort_count++; 4805 sqlite3_search_count--; 4806 #endif 4807 p->aCounter[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_SORT]++; 4808 /* Fall through into OP_Rewind */ 4809 } 4810 /* Opcode: Rewind P1 P2 * * * 4811 ** 4812 ** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Next instruction for P1 4813 ** will refer to the first entry in the database table or index. 4814 ** If the table or index is empty, jump immediately to P2. 4815 ** If the table or index is not empty, fall through to the following 4816 ** instruction. 4817 ** 4818 ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in forward order, 4819 ** from the beginning toward the end. In other words, the cursor is 4820 ** configured to use Next, not Prev. 4821 */ 4822 case OP_Rewind: { /* jump */ 4823 VdbeCursor *pC; 4824 BtCursor *pCrsr; 4825 int res; 4826 4827 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 4828 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 4829 assert( pC!=0 ); 4830 assert( isSorter(pC)==(pOp->opcode==OP_SorterSort) ); 4831 res = 1; 4832 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 4833 pC->seekOp = OP_Rewind; 4834 #endif 4835 if( isSorter(pC) ){ 4836 rc = sqlite3VdbeSorterRewind(pC, &res); 4837 }else{ 4838 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 4839 pCrsr = pC->uc.pCursor; 4840 assert( pCrsr ); 4841 rc = sqlite3BtreeFirst(pCrsr, &res); 4842 pC->deferredMoveto = 0; 4843 pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; 4844 } 4845 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 4846 pC->nullRow = (u8)res; 4847 assert( pOp->p2>0 && pOp->p2<p->nOp ); 4848 VdbeBranchTaken(res!=0,2); 4849 if( res ) goto jump_to_p2; 4850 break; 4851 } 4852 4853 /* Opcode: Next P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 4854 ** 4855 ** Advance cursor P1 so that it points to the next key/data pair in its 4856 ** table or index. If there are no more key/value pairs then fall through 4857 ** to the following instruction. But if the cursor advance was successful, 4858 ** jump immediately to P2. 4859 ** 4860 ** The Next opcode is only valid following an SeekGT, SeekGE, or 4861 ** OP_Rewind opcode used to position the cursor. Next is not allowed 4862 ** to follow SeekLT, SeekLE, or OP_Last. 4863 ** 4864 ** The P1 cursor must be for a real table, not a pseudo-table. P1 must have 4865 ** been opened prior to this opcode or the program will segfault. 4866 ** 4867 ** The P3 value is a hint to the btree implementation. If P3==1, that 4868 ** means P1 is an SQL index and that this instruction could have been 4869 ** omitted if that index had been unique. P3 is usually 0. P3 is 4870 ** always either 0 or 1. 4871 ** 4872 ** P4 is always of type P4_ADVANCE. The function pointer points to 4873 ** sqlite3BtreeNext(). 4874 ** 4875 ** If P5 is positive and the jump is taken, then event counter 4876 ** number P5-1 in the prepared statement is incremented. 4877 ** 4878 ** See also: Prev, NextIfOpen 4879 */ 4880 /* Opcode: NextIfOpen P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 4881 ** 4882 ** This opcode works just like Next except that if cursor P1 is not 4883 ** open it behaves a no-op. 4884 */ 4885 /* Opcode: Prev P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 4886 ** 4887 ** Back up cursor P1 so that it points to the previous key/data pair in its 4888 ** table or index. If there is no previous key/value pairs then fall through 4889 ** to the following instruction. But if the cursor backup was successful, 4890 ** jump immediately to P2. 4891 ** 4892 ** 4893 ** The Prev opcode is only valid following an SeekLT, SeekLE, or 4894 ** OP_Last opcode used to position the cursor. Prev is not allowed 4895 ** to follow SeekGT, SeekGE, or OP_Rewind. 4896 ** 4897 ** The P1 cursor must be for a real table, not a pseudo-table. If P1 is 4898 ** not open then the behavior is undefined. 4899 ** 4900 ** The P3 value is a hint to the btree implementation. If P3==1, that 4901 ** means P1 is an SQL index and that this instruction could have been 4902 ** omitted if that index had been unique. P3 is usually 0. P3 is 4903 ** always either 0 or 1. 4904 ** 4905 ** P4 is always of type P4_ADVANCE. The function pointer points to 4906 ** sqlite3BtreePrevious(). 4907 ** 4908 ** If P5 is positive and the jump is taken, then event counter 4909 ** number P5-1 in the prepared statement is incremented. 4910 */ 4911 /* Opcode: PrevIfOpen P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 4912 ** 4913 ** This opcode works just like Prev except that if cursor P1 is not 4914 ** open it behaves a no-op. 4915 */ 4916 case OP_SorterNext: { /* jump */ 4917 VdbeCursor *pC; 4918 int res; 4919 4920 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 4921 assert( isSorter(pC) ); 4922 res = 0; 4923 rc = sqlite3VdbeSorterNext(db, pC, &res); 4924 goto next_tail; 4925 case OP_PrevIfOpen: /* jump */ 4926 case OP_NextIfOpen: /* jump */ 4927 if( p->apCsr[pOp->p1]==0 ) break; 4928 /* Fall through */ 4929 case OP_Prev: /* jump */ 4930 case OP_Next: /* jump */ 4931 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 4932 assert( pOp->p5<ArraySize(p->aCounter) ); 4933 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 4934 res = pOp->p3; 4935 assert( pC!=0 ); 4936 assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 ); 4937 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 4938 assert( res==0 || (res==1 && pC->isTable==0) ); 4939 testcase( res==1 ); 4940 assert( pOp->opcode!=OP_Next || pOp->p4.xAdvance==sqlite3BtreeNext ); 4941 assert( pOp->opcode!=OP_Prev || pOp->p4.xAdvance==sqlite3BtreePrevious ); 4942 assert( pOp->opcode!=OP_NextIfOpen || pOp->p4.xAdvance==sqlite3BtreeNext ); 4943 assert( pOp->opcode!=OP_PrevIfOpen || pOp->p4.xAdvance==sqlite3BtreePrevious); 4944 4945 /* The Next opcode is only used after SeekGT, SeekGE, and Rewind. 4946 ** The Prev opcode is only used after SeekLT, SeekLE, and Last. */ 4947 assert( pOp->opcode!=OP_Next || pOp->opcode!=OP_NextIfOpen 4948 || pC->seekOp==OP_SeekGT || pC->seekOp==OP_SeekGE 4949 || pC->seekOp==OP_Rewind || pC->seekOp==OP_Found); 4950 assert( pOp->opcode!=OP_Prev || pOp->opcode!=OP_PrevIfOpen 4951 || pC->seekOp==OP_SeekLT || pC->seekOp==OP_SeekLE 4952 || pC->seekOp==OP_Last ); 4953 4954 rc = pOp->p4.xAdvance(pC->uc.pCursor, &res); 4955 next_tail: 4956 pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; 4957 VdbeBranchTaken(res==0,2); 4958 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 4959 if( res==0 ){ 4960 pC->nullRow = 0; 4961 p->aCounter[pOp->p5]++; 4962 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST 4963 sqlite3_search_count++; 4964 #endif 4965 goto jump_to_p2_and_check_for_interrupt; 4966 }else{ 4967 pC->nullRow = 1; 4968 } 4969 goto check_for_interrupt; 4970 } 4971 4972 /* Opcode: IdxInsert P1 P2 P3 * P5 4973 ** Synopsis: key=r[P2] 4974 ** 4975 ** Register P2 holds an SQL index key made using the 4976 ** MakeRecord instructions. This opcode writes that key 4977 ** into the index P1. Data for the entry is nil. 4978 ** 4979 ** P3 is a flag that provides a hint to the b-tree layer that this 4980 ** insert is likely to be an append. 4981 ** 4982 ** If P5 has the OPFLAG_NCHANGE bit set, then the change counter is 4983 ** incremented by this instruction. If the OPFLAG_NCHANGE bit is clear, 4984 ** then the change counter is unchanged. 4985 ** 4986 ** If P5 has the OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT bit set, then the cursor must have 4987 ** just done a seek to the spot where the new entry is to be inserted. 4988 ** This flag avoids doing an extra seek. 4989 ** 4990 ** This instruction only works for indices. The equivalent instruction 4991 ** for tables is OP_Insert. 4992 */ 4993 case OP_SorterInsert: /* in2 */ 4994 case OP_IdxInsert: { /* in2 */ 4995 VdbeCursor *pC; 4996 BtreePayload x; 4997 4998 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 4999 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 5000 assert( pC!=0 ); 5001 assert( isSorter(pC)==(pOp->opcode==OP_SorterInsert) ); 5002 pIn2 = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 5003 assert( pIn2->flags & MEM_Blob ); 5004 if( pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_NCHANGE ) p->nChange++; 5005 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE || pOp->opcode==OP_SorterInsert ); 5006 assert( pC->isTable==0 ); 5007 rc = ExpandBlob(pIn2); 5008 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 5009 if( pOp->opcode==OP_SorterInsert ){ 5010 rc = sqlite3VdbeSorterWrite(pC, pIn2); 5011 }else{ 5012 x.nKey = pIn2->n; 5013 x.pKey = pIn2->z; 5014 x.nData = 0; 5015 x.nZero = 0; 5016 x.pData = 0; 5017 rc = sqlite3BtreeInsert(pC->uc.pCursor, &x, pOp->p3, 5018 ((pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT) ? pC->seekResult : 0) 5019 ); 5020 assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 ); 5021 pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; 5022 } 5023 if( rc) goto abort_due_to_error; 5024 break; 5025 } 5026 5027 /* Opcode: IdxDelete P1 P2 P3 * * 5028 ** Synopsis: key=r[P2@P3] 5029 ** 5030 ** The content of P3 registers starting at register P2 form 5031 ** an unpacked index key. This opcode removes that entry from the 5032 ** index opened by cursor P1. 5033 */ 5034 case OP_IdxDelete: { 5035 VdbeCursor *pC; 5036 BtCursor *pCrsr; 5037 int res; 5038 UnpackedRecord r; 5039 5040 assert( pOp->p3>0 ); 5041 assert( pOp->p2>0 && pOp->p2+pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)+1 ); 5042 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 5043 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 5044 assert( pC!=0 ); 5045 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 5046 pCrsr = pC->uc.pCursor; 5047 assert( pCrsr!=0 ); 5048 assert( pOp->p5==0 ); 5049 r.pKeyInfo = pC->pKeyInfo; 5050 r.nField = (u16)pOp->p3; 5051 r.default_rc = 0; 5052 r.aMem = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 5053 rc = sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked(pCrsr, &r, 0, 0, &res); 5054 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 5055 if( res==0 ){ 5056 rc = sqlite3BtreeDelete(pCrsr, BTREE_AUXDELETE); 5057 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 5058 } 5059 assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 ); 5060 pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; 5061 break; 5062 } 5063 5064 /* Opcode: Seek P1 * P3 P4 * 5065 ** Synopsis: Move P3 to P1.rowid 5066 ** 5067 ** P1 is an open index cursor and P3 is a cursor on the corresponding 5068 ** table. This opcode does a deferred seek of the P3 table cursor 5069 ** to the row that corresponds to the current row of P1. 5070 ** 5071 ** This is a deferred seek. Nothing actually happens until 5072 ** the cursor is used to read a record. That way, if no reads 5073 ** occur, no unnecessary I/O happens. 5074 ** 5075 ** P4 may be an array of integers (type P4_INTARRAY) containing 5076 ** one entry for each column in the P3 table. If array entry a(i) 5077 ** is non-zero, then reading column a(i)-1 from cursor P3 is 5078 ** equivalent to performing the deferred seek and then reading column i 5079 ** from P1. This information is stored in P3 and used to redirect 5080 ** reads against P3 over to P1, thus possibly avoiding the need to 5081 ** seek and read cursor P3. 5082 */ 5083 /* Opcode: IdxRowid P1 P2 * * * 5084 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=rowid 5085 ** 5086 ** Write into register P2 an integer which is the last entry in the record at 5087 ** the end of the index key pointed to by cursor P1. This integer should be 5088 ** the rowid of the table entry to which this index entry points. 5089 ** 5090 ** See also: Rowid, MakeRecord. 5091 */ 5092 case OP_Seek: 5093 case OP_IdxRowid: { /* out2 */ 5094 VdbeCursor *pC; /* The P1 index cursor */ 5095 VdbeCursor *pTabCur; /* The P2 table cursor (OP_Seek only) */ 5096 i64 rowid; /* Rowid that P1 current points to */ 5097 5098 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 5099 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 5100 assert( pC!=0 ); 5101 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 5102 assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 ); 5103 assert( pC->isTable==0 ); 5104 assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 ); 5105 assert( !pC->nullRow || pOp->opcode==OP_IdxRowid ); 5106 5107 /* The IdxRowid and Seek opcodes are combined because of the commonality 5108 ** of sqlite3VdbeCursorRestore() and sqlite3VdbeIdxRowid(). */ 5109 rc = sqlite3VdbeCursorRestore(pC); 5110 5111 /* sqlite3VbeCursorRestore() can only fail if the record has been deleted 5112 ** out from under the cursor. That will never happens for an IdxRowid 5113 ** or Seek opcode */ 5114 if( NEVER(rc!=SQLITE_OK) ) goto abort_due_to_error; 5115 5116 if( !pC->nullRow ){ 5117 rowid = 0; /* Not needed. Only used to silence a warning. */ 5118 rc = sqlite3VdbeIdxRowid(db, pC->uc.pCursor, &rowid); 5119 if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ 5120 goto abort_due_to_error; 5121 } 5122 if( pOp->opcode==OP_Seek ){ 5123 assert( pOp->p3>=0 && pOp->p3<p->nCursor ); 5124 pTabCur = p->apCsr[pOp->p3]; 5125 assert( pTabCur!=0 ); 5126 assert( pTabCur->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 5127 assert( pTabCur->uc.pCursor!=0 ); 5128 assert( pTabCur->isTable ); 5129 pTabCur->nullRow = 0; 5130 pTabCur->movetoTarget = rowid; 5131 pTabCur->deferredMoveto = 1; 5132 assert( pOp->p4type==P4_INTARRAY || pOp->p4.ai==0 ); 5133 pTabCur->aAltMap = pOp->p4.ai; 5134 pTabCur->pAltCursor = pC; 5135 }else{ 5136 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 5137 pOut->u.i = rowid; 5138 pOut->flags = MEM_Int; 5139 } 5140 }else{ 5141 assert( pOp->opcode==OP_IdxRowid ); 5142 sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(&aMem[pOp->p2]); 5143 } 5144 break; 5145 } 5146 5147 /* Opcode: IdxGE P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 5148 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] 5149 ** 5150 ** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index 5151 ** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY. Compare this key value against the index 5152 ** that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID 5153 ** fields at the end. 5154 ** 5155 ** If the P1 index entry is greater than or equal to the key value 5156 ** then jump to P2. Otherwise fall through to the next instruction. 5157 */ 5158 /* Opcode: IdxGT P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 5159 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] 5160 ** 5161 ** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index 5162 ** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY. Compare this key value against the index 5163 ** that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID 5164 ** fields at the end. 5165 ** 5166 ** If the P1 index entry is greater than the key value 5167 ** then jump to P2. Otherwise fall through to the next instruction. 5168 */ 5169 /* Opcode: IdxLT P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 5170 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] 5171 ** 5172 ** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index 5173 ** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID. Compare this key value against 5174 ** the index that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or 5175 ** ROWID on the P1 index. 5176 ** 5177 ** If the P1 index entry is less than the key value then jump to P2. 5178 ** Otherwise fall through to the next instruction. 5179 */ 5180 /* Opcode: IdxLE P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 5181 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] 5182 ** 5183 ** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index 5184 ** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID. Compare this key value against 5185 ** the index that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or 5186 ** ROWID on the P1 index. 5187 ** 5188 ** If the P1 index entry is less than or equal to the key value then jump 5189 ** to P2. Otherwise fall through to the next instruction. 5190 */ 5191 case OP_IdxLE: /* jump */ 5192 case OP_IdxGT: /* jump */ 5193 case OP_IdxLT: /* jump */ 5194 case OP_IdxGE: { /* jump */ 5195 VdbeCursor *pC; 5196 int res; 5197 UnpackedRecord r; 5198 5199 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 5200 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 5201 assert( pC!=0 ); 5202 assert( pC->isOrdered ); 5203 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 5204 assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0); 5205 assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 ); 5206 assert( pOp->p5==0 || pOp->p5==1 ); 5207 assert( pOp->p4type==P4_INT32 ); 5208 r.pKeyInfo = pC->pKeyInfo; 5209 r.nField = (u16)pOp->p4.i; 5210 if( pOp->opcode<OP_IdxLT ){ 5211 assert( pOp->opcode==OP_IdxLE || pOp->opcode==OP_IdxGT ); 5212 r.default_rc = -1; 5213 }else{ 5214 assert( pOp->opcode==OP_IdxGE || pOp->opcode==OP_IdxLT ); 5215 r.default_rc = 0; 5216 } 5217 r.aMem = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 5218 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 5219 { int i; for(i=0; i<r.nField; i++) assert( memIsValid(&r.aMem[i]) ); } 5220 #endif 5221 res = 0; /* Not needed. Only used to silence a warning. */ 5222 rc = sqlite3VdbeIdxKeyCompare(db, pC, &r, &res); 5223 assert( (OP_IdxLE&1)==(OP_IdxLT&1) && (OP_IdxGE&1)==(OP_IdxGT&1) ); 5224 if( (pOp->opcode&1)==(OP_IdxLT&1) ){ 5225 assert( pOp->opcode==OP_IdxLE || pOp->opcode==OP_IdxLT ); 5226 res = -res; 5227 }else{ 5228 assert( pOp->opcode==OP_IdxGE || pOp->opcode==OP_IdxGT ); 5229 res++; 5230 } 5231 VdbeBranchTaken(res>0,2); 5232 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 5233 if( res>0 ) goto jump_to_p2; 5234 break; 5235 } 5236 5237 /* Opcode: Destroy P1 P2 P3 * * 5238 ** 5239 ** Delete an entire database table or index whose root page in the database 5240 ** file is given by P1. 5241 ** 5242 ** The table being destroyed is in the main database file if P3==0. If 5243 ** P3==1 then the table to be clear is in the auxiliary database file 5244 ** that is used to store tables create using CREATE TEMPORARY TABLE. 5245 ** 5246 ** If AUTOVACUUM is enabled then it is possible that another root page 5247 ** might be moved into the newly deleted root page in order to keep all 5248 ** root pages contiguous at the beginning of the database. The former 5249 ** value of the root page that moved - its value before the move occurred - 5250 ** is stored in register P2. If no page 5251 ** movement was required (because the table being dropped was already 5252 ** the last one in the database) then a zero is stored in register P2. 5253 ** If AUTOVACUUM is disabled then a zero is stored in register P2. 5254 ** 5255 ** See also: Clear 5256 */ 5257 case OP_Destroy: { /* out2 */ 5258 int iMoved; 5259 int iDb; 5260 5261 assert( p->readOnly==0 ); 5262 assert( pOp->p1>1 ); 5263 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 5264 pOut->flags = MEM_Null; 5265 if( db->nVdbeRead > db->nVDestroy+1 ){ 5266 rc = SQLITE_LOCKED; 5267 p->errorAction = OE_Abort; 5268 goto abort_due_to_error; 5269 }else{ 5270 iDb = pOp->p3; 5271 assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, iDb) ); 5272 iMoved = 0; /* Not needed. Only to silence a warning. */ 5273 rc = sqlite3BtreeDropTable(db->aDb[iDb].pBt, pOp->p1, &iMoved); 5274 pOut->flags = MEM_Int; 5275 pOut->u.i = iMoved; 5276 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 5277 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM 5278 if( iMoved!=0 ){ 5279 sqlite3RootPageMoved(db, iDb, iMoved, pOp->p1); 5280 /* All OP_Destroy operations occur on the same btree */ 5281 assert( resetSchemaOnFault==0 || resetSchemaOnFault==iDb+1 ); 5282 resetSchemaOnFault = iDb+1; 5283 } 5284 #endif 5285 } 5286 break; 5287 } 5288 5289 /* Opcode: Clear P1 P2 P3 5290 ** 5291 ** Delete all contents of the database table or index whose root page 5292 ** in the database file is given by P1. But, unlike Destroy, do not 5293 ** remove the table or index from the database file. 5294 ** 5295 ** The table being clear is in the main database file if P2==0. If 5296 ** P2==1 then the table to be clear is in the auxiliary database file 5297 ** that is used to store tables create using CREATE TEMPORARY TABLE. 5298 ** 5299 ** If the P3 value is non-zero, then the table referred to must be an 5300 ** intkey table (an SQL table, not an index). In this case the row change 5301 ** count is incremented by the number of rows in the table being cleared. 5302 ** If P3 is greater than zero, then the value stored in register P3 is 5303 ** also incremented by the number of rows in the table being cleared. 5304 ** 5305 ** See also: Destroy 5306 */ 5307 case OP_Clear: { 5308 int nChange; 5309 5310 nChange = 0; 5311 assert( p->readOnly==0 ); 5312 assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, pOp->p2) ); 5313 rc = sqlite3BtreeClearTable( 5314 db->aDb[pOp->p2].pBt, pOp->p1, (pOp->p3 ? &nChange : 0) 5315 ); 5316 if( pOp->p3 ){ 5317 p->nChange += nChange; 5318 if( pOp->p3>0 ){ 5319 assert( memIsValid(&aMem[pOp->p3]) ); 5320 memAboutToChange(p, &aMem[pOp->p3]); 5321 aMem[pOp->p3].u.i += nChange; 5322 } 5323 } 5324 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 5325 break; 5326 } 5327 5328 /* Opcode: ResetSorter P1 * * * * 5329 ** 5330 ** Delete all contents from the ephemeral table or sorter 5331 ** that is open on cursor P1. 5332 ** 5333 ** This opcode only works for cursors used for sorting and 5334 ** opened with OP_OpenEphemeral or OP_SorterOpen. 5335 */ 5336 case OP_ResetSorter: { 5337 VdbeCursor *pC; 5338 5339 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 5340 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 5341 assert( pC!=0 ); 5342 if( isSorter(pC) ){ 5343 sqlite3VdbeSorterReset(db, pC->uc.pSorter); 5344 }else{ 5345 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 5346 assert( pC->isEphemeral ); 5347 rc = sqlite3BtreeClearTableOfCursor(pC->uc.pCursor); 5348 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 5349 } 5350 break; 5351 } 5352 5353 /* Opcode: CreateTable P1 P2 * * * 5354 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=root iDb=P1 5355 ** 5356 ** Allocate a new table in the main database file if P1==0 or in the 5357 ** auxiliary database file if P1==1 or in an attached database if 5358 ** P1>1. Write the root page number of the new table into 5359 ** register P2 5360 ** 5361 ** The difference between a table and an index is this: A table must 5362 ** have a 4-byte integer key and can have arbitrary data. An index 5363 ** has an arbitrary key but no data. 5364 ** 5365 ** See also: CreateIndex 5366 */ 5367 /* Opcode: CreateIndex P1 P2 * * * 5368 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=root iDb=P1 5369 ** 5370 ** Allocate a new index in the main database file if P1==0 or in the 5371 ** auxiliary database file if P1==1 or in an attached database if 5372 ** P1>1. Write the root page number of the new table into 5373 ** register P2. 5374 ** 5375 ** See documentation on OP_CreateTable for additional information. 5376 */ 5377 case OP_CreateIndex: /* out2 */ 5378 case OP_CreateTable: { /* out2 */ 5379 int pgno; 5380 int flags; 5381 Db *pDb; 5382 5383 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 5384 pgno = 0; 5385 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb ); 5386 assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, pOp->p1) ); 5387 assert( p->readOnly==0 ); 5388 pDb = &db->aDb[pOp->p1]; 5389 assert( pDb->pBt!=0 ); 5390 if( pOp->opcode==OP_CreateTable ){ 5391 /* flags = BTREE_INTKEY; */ 5392 flags = BTREE_INTKEY; 5393 }else{ 5394 flags = BTREE_BLOBKEY; 5395 } 5396 rc = sqlite3BtreeCreateTable(pDb->pBt, &pgno, flags); 5397 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 5398 pOut->u.i = pgno; 5399 break; 5400 } 5401 5402 /* Opcode: ParseSchema P1 * * P4 * 5403 ** 5404 ** Read and parse all entries from the SQLITE_MASTER table of database P1 5405 ** that match the WHERE clause P4. 5406 ** 5407 ** This opcode invokes the parser to create a new virtual machine, 5408 ** then runs the new virtual machine. It is thus a re-entrant opcode. 5409 */ 5410 case OP_ParseSchema: { 5411 int iDb; 5412 const char *zMaster; 5413 char *zSql; 5414 InitData initData; 5415 5416 /* Any prepared statement that invokes this opcode will hold mutexes 5417 ** on every btree. This is a prerequisite for invoking 5418 ** sqlite3InitCallback(). 5419 */ 5420 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 5421 for(iDb=0; iDb<db->nDb; iDb++){ 5422 assert( iDb==1 || sqlite3BtreeHoldsMutex(db->aDb[iDb].pBt) ); 5423 } 5424 #endif 5425 5426 iDb = pOp->p1; 5427 assert( iDb>=0 && iDb<db->nDb ); 5428 assert( DbHasProperty(db, iDb, DB_SchemaLoaded) ); 5429 /* Used to be a conditional */ { 5430 zMaster = SCHEMA_TABLE(iDb); 5431 initData.db = db; 5432 initData.iDb = pOp->p1; 5433 initData.pzErrMsg = &p->zErrMsg; 5434 zSql = sqlite3MPrintf(db, 5435 "SELECT name, rootpage, sql FROM '%q'.%s WHERE %s ORDER BY rowid", 5436 db->aDb[iDb].zName, zMaster, pOp->p4.z); 5437 if( zSql==0 ){ 5438 rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; 5439 }else{ 5440 assert( db->init.busy==0 ); 5441 db->init.busy = 1; 5442 initData.rc = SQLITE_OK; 5443 assert( !db->mallocFailed ); 5444 rc = sqlite3_exec(db, zSql, sqlite3InitCallback, &initData, 0); 5445 if( rc==SQLITE_OK ) rc = initData.rc; 5446 sqlite3DbFree(db, zSql); 5447 db->init.busy = 0; 5448 } 5449 } 5450 if( rc ){ 5451 sqlite3ResetAllSchemasOfConnection(db); 5452 if( rc==SQLITE_NOMEM ){ 5453 goto no_mem; 5454 } 5455 goto abort_due_to_error; 5456 } 5457 break; 5458 } 5459 5460 #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_ANALYZE) 5461 /* Opcode: LoadAnalysis P1 * * * * 5462 ** 5463 ** Read the sqlite_stat1 table for database P1 and load the content 5464 ** of that table into the internal index hash table. This will cause 5465 ** the analysis to be used when preparing all subsequent queries. 5466 */ 5467 case OP_LoadAnalysis: { 5468 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb ); 5469 rc = sqlite3AnalysisLoad(db, pOp->p1); 5470 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 5471 break; 5472 } 5473 #endif /* !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_ANALYZE) */ 5474 5475 /* Opcode: DropTable P1 * * P4 * 5476 ** 5477 ** Remove the internal (in-memory) data structures that describe 5478 ** the table named P4 in database P1. This is called after a table 5479 ** is dropped from disk (using the Destroy opcode) in order to keep 5480 ** the internal representation of the 5481 ** schema consistent with what is on disk. 5482 */ 5483 case OP_DropTable: { 5484 sqlite3UnlinkAndDeleteTable(db, pOp->p1, pOp->p4.z); 5485 break; 5486 } 5487 5488 /* Opcode: DropIndex P1 * * P4 * 5489 ** 5490 ** Remove the internal (in-memory) data structures that describe 5491 ** the index named P4 in database P1. This is called after an index 5492 ** is dropped from disk (using the Destroy opcode) 5493 ** in order to keep the internal representation of the 5494 ** schema consistent with what is on disk. 5495 */ 5496 case OP_DropIndex: { 5497 sqlite3UnlinkAndDeleteIndex(db, pOp->p1, pOp->p4.z); 5498 break; 5499 } 5500 5501 /* Opcode: DropTrigger P1 * * P4 * 5502 ** 5503 ** Remove the internal (in-memory) data structures that describe 5504 ** the trigger named P4 in database P1. This is called after a trigger 5505 ** is dropped from disk (using the Destroy opcode) in order to keep 5506 ** the internal representation of the 5507 ** schema consistent with what is on disk. 5508 */ 5509 case OP_DropTrigger: { 5510 sqlite3UnlinkAndDeleteTrigger(db, pOp->p1, pOp->p4.z); 5511 break; 5512 } 5513 5514 5515 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_INTEGRITY_CHECK 5516 /* Opcode: IntegrityCk P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 5517 ** 5518 ** Do an analysis of the currently open database. Store in 5519 ** register P1 the text of an error message describing any problems. 5520 ** If no problems are found, store a NULL in register P1. 5521 ** 5522 ** The register P3 contains the maximum number of allowed errors. 5523 ** At most reg(P3) errors will be reported. 5524 ** In other words, the analysis stops as soon as reg(P1) errors are 5525 ** seen. Reg(P1) is updated with the number of errors remaining. 5526 ** 5527 ** The root page numbers of all tables in the database are integers 5528 ** stored in P4_INTARRAY argument. 5529 ** 5530 ** If P5 is not zero, the check is done on the auxiliary database 5531 ** file, not the main database file. 5532 ** 5533 ** This opcode is used to implement the integrity_check pragma. 5534 */ 5535 case OP_IntegrityCk: { 5536 int nRoot; /* Number of tables to check. (Number of root pages.) */ 5537 int *aRoot; /* Array of rootpage numbers for tables to be checked */ 5538 int nErr; /* Number of errors reported */ 5539 char *z; /* Text of the error report */ 5540 Mem *pnErr; /* Register keeping track of errors remaining */ 5541 5542 assert( p->bIsReader ); 5543 nRoot = pOp->p2; 5544 aRoot = pOp->p4.ai; 5545 assert( nRoot>0 ); 5546 assert( aRoot[nRoot]==0 ); 5547 assert( pOp->p3>0 && pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); 5548 pnErr = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 5549 assert( (pnErr->flags & MEM_Int)!=0 ); 5550 assert( (pnErr->flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Blob))==0 ); 5551 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 5552 assert( pOp->p5<db->nDb ); 5553 assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, pOp->p5) ); 5554 z = sqlite3BtreeIntegrityCheck(db->aDb[pOp->p5].pBt, aRoot, nRoot, 5555 (int)pnErr->u.i, &nErr); 5556 pnErr->u.i -= nErr; 5557 sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pIn1); 5558 if( nErr==0 ){ 5559 assert( z==0 ); 5560 }else if( z==0 ){ 5561 goto no_mem; 5562 }else{ 5563 sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pIn1, z, -1, SQLITE_UTF8, sqlite3_free); 5564 } 5565 UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pIn1); 5566 sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(pIn1, encoding); 5567 break; 5568 } 5569 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_INTEGRITY_CHECK */ 5570 5571 /* Opcode: RowSetAdd P1 P2 * * * 5572 ** Synopsis: rowset(P1)=r[P2] 5573 ** 5574 ** Insert the integer value held by register P2 into a boolean index 5575 ** held in register P1. 5576 ** 5577 ** An assertion fails if P2 is not an integer. 5578 */ 5579 case OP_RowSetAdd: { /* in1, in2 */ 5580 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 5581 pIn2 = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 5582 assert( (pIn2->flags & MEM_Int)!=0 ); 5583 if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_RowSet)==0 ){ 5584 sqlite3VdbeMemSetRowSet(pIn1); 5585 if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_RowSet)==0 ) goto no_mem; 5586 } 5587 sqlite3RowSetInsert(pIn1->u.pRowSet, pIn2->u.i); 5588 break; 5589 } 5590 5591 /* Opcode: RowSetRead P1 P2 P3 * * 5592 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=rowset(P1) 5593 ** 5594 ** Extract the smallest value from boolean index P1 and put that value into 5595 ** register P3. Or, if boolean index P1 is initially empty, leave P3 5596 ** unchanged and jump to instruction P2. 5597 */ 5598 case OP_RowSetRead: { /* jump, in1, out3 */ 5599 i64 val; 5600 5601 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 5602 if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_RowSet)==0 5603 || sqlite3RowSetNext(pIn1->u.pRowSet, &val)==0 5604 ){ 5605 /* The boolean index is empty */ 5606 sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pIn1); 5607 VdbeBranchTaken(1,2); 5608 goto jump_to_p2_and_check_for_interrupt; 5609 }else{ 5610 /* A value was pulled from the index */ 5611 VdbeBranchTaken(0,2); 5612 sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(&aMem[pOp->p3], val); 5613 } 5614 goto check_for_interrupt; 5615 } 5616 5617 /* Opcode: RowSetTest P1 P2 P3 P4 5618 ** Synopsis: if r[P3] in rowset(P1) goto P2 5619 ** 5620 ** Register P3 is assumed to hold a 64-bit integer value. If register P1 5621 ** contains a RowSet object and that RowSet object contains 5622 ** the value held in P3, jump to register P2. Otherwise, insert the 5623 ** integer in P3 into the RowSet and continue on to the 5624 ** next opcode. 5625 ** 5626 ** The RowSet object is optimized for the case where successive sets 5627 ** of integers, where each set contains no duplicates. Each set 5628 ** of values is identified by a unique P4 value. The first set 5629 ** must have P4==0, the final set P4=-1. P4 must be either -1 or 5630 ** non-negative. For non-negative values of P4 only the lower 4 5631 ** bits are significant. 5632 ** 5633 ** This allows optimizations: (a) when P4==0 there is no need to test 5634 ** the rowset object for P3, as it is guaranteed not to contain it, 5635 ** (b) when P4==-1 there is no need to insert the value, as it will 5636 ** never be tested for, and (c) when a value that is part of set X is 5637 ** inserted, there is no need to search to see if the same value was 5638 ** previously inserted as part of set X (only if it was previously 5639 ** inserted as part of some other set). 5640 */ 5641 case OP_RowSetTest: { /* jump, in1, in3 */ 5642 int iSet; 5643 int exists; 5644 5645 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 5646 pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 5647 iSet = pOp->p4.i; 5648 assert( pIn3->flags&MEM_Int ); 5649 5650 /* If there is anything other than a rowset object in memory cell P1, 5651 ** delete it now and initialize P1 with an empty rowset 5652 */ 5653 if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_RowSet)==0 ){ 5654 sqlite3VdbeMemSetRowSet(pIn1); 5655 if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_RowSet)==0 ) goto no_mem; 5656 } 5657 5658 assert( pOp->p4type==P4_INT32 ); 5659 assert( iSet==-1 || iSet>=0 ); 5660 if( iSet ){ 5661 exists = sqlite3RowSetTest(pIn1->u.pRowSet, iSet, pIn3->u.i); 5662 VdbeBranchTaken(exists!=0,2); 5663 if( exists ) goto jump_to_p2; 5664 } 5665 if( iSet>=0 ){ 5666 sqlite3RowSetInsert(pIn1->u.pRowSet, pIn3->u.i); 5667 } 5668 break; 5669 } 5670 5671 5672 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER 5673 5674 /* Opcode: Program P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 5675 ** 5676 ** Execute the trigger program passed as P4 (type P4_SUBPROGRAM). 5677 ** 5678 ** P1 contains the address of the memory cell that contains the first memory 5679 ** cell in an array of values used as arguments to the sub-program. P2 5680 ** contains the address to jump to if the sub-program throws an IGNORE 5681 ** exception using the RAISE() function. Register P3 contains the address 5682 ** of a memory cell in this (the parent) VM that is used to allocate the 5683 ** memory required by the sub-vdbe at runtime. 5684 ** 5685 ** P4 is a pointer to the VM containing the trigger program. 5686 ** 5687 ** If P5 is non-zero, then recursive program invocation is enabled. 5688 */ 5689 case OP_Program: { /* jump */ 5690 int nMem; /* Number of memory registers for sub-program */ 5691 int nByte; /* Bytes of runtime space required for sub-program */ 5692 Mem *pRt; /* Register to allocate runtime space */ 5693 Mem *pMem; /* Used to iterate through memory cells */ 5694 Mem *pEnd; /* Last memory cell in new array */ 5695 VdbeFrame *pFrame; /* New vdbe frame to execute in */ 5696 SubProgram *pProgram; /* Sub-program to execute */ 5697 void *t; /* Token identifying trigger */ 5698 5699 pProgram = pOp->p4.pProgram; 5700 pRt = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 5701 assert( pProgram->nOp>0 ); 5702 5703 /* If the p5 flag is clear, then recursive invocation of triggers is 5704 ** disabled for backwards compatibility (p5 is set if this sub-program 5705 ** is really a trigger, not a foreign key action, and the flag set 5706 ** and cleared by the "PRAGMA recursive_triggers" command is clear). 5707 ** 5708 ** It is recursive invocation of triggers, at the SQL level, that is 5709 ** disabled. In some cases a single trigger may generate more than one 5710 ** SubProgram (if the trigger may be executed with more than one different 5711 ** ON CONFLICT algorithm). SubProgram structures associated with a 5712 ** single trigger all have the same value for the SubProgram.token 5713 ** variable. */ 5714 if( pOp->p5 ){ 5715 t = pProgram->token; 5716 for(pFrame=p->pFrame; pFrame && pFrame->token!=t; pFrame=pFrame->pParent); 5717 if( pFrame ) break; 5718 } 5719 5720 if( p->nFrame>=db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_TRIGGER_DEPTH] ){ 5721 rc = SQLITE_ERROR; 5722 sqlite3VdbeError(p, "too many levels of trigger recursion"); 5723 goto abort_due_to_error; 5724 } 5725 5726 /* Register pRt is used to store the memory required to save the state 5727 ** of the current program, and the memory required at runtime to execute 5728 ** the trigger program. If this trigger has been fired before, then pRt 5729 ** is already allocated. Otherwise, it must be initialized. */ 5730 if( (pRt->flags&MEM_Frame)==0 ){ 5731 /* SubProgram.nMem is set to the number of memory cells used by the 5732 ** program stored in SubProgram.aOp. As well as these, one memory 5733 ** cell is required for each cursor used by the program. Set local 5734 ** variable nMem (and later, VdbeFrame.nChildMem) to this value. 5735 */ 5736 nMem = pProgram->nMem + pProgram->nCsr; 5737 assert( nMem>0 ); 5738 if( pProgram->nCsr==0 ) nMem++; 5739 nByte = ROUND8(sizeof(VdbeFrame)) 5740 + nMem * sizeof(Mem) 5741 + pProgram->nCsr * sizeof(VdbeCursor *) 5742 + pProgram->nOnce * sizeof(u8); 5743 pFrame = sqlite3DbMallocZero(db, nByte); 5744 if( !pFrame ){ 5745 goto no_mem; 5746 } 5747 sqlite3VdbeMemRelease(pRt); 5748 pRt->flags = MEM_Frame; 5749 pRt->u.pFrame = pFrame; 5750 5751 pFrame->v = p; 5752 pFrame->nChildMem = nMem; 5753 pFrame->nChildCsr = pProgram->nCsr; 5754 pFrame->pc = (int)(pOp - aOp); 5755 pFrame->aMem = p->aMem; 5756 pFrame->nMem = p->nMem; 5757 pFrame->apCsr = p->apCsr; 5758 pFrame->nCursor = p->nCursor; 5759 pFrame->aOp = p->aOp; 5760 pFrame->nOp = p->nOp; 5761 pFrame->token = pProgram->token; 5762 pFrame->aOnceFlag = p->aOnceFlag; 5763 pFrame->nOnceFlag = p->nOnceFlag; 5764 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS 5765 pFrame->anExec = p->anExec; 5766 #endif 5767 5768 pEnd = &VdbeFrameMem(pFrame)[pFrame->nChildMem]; 5769 for(pMem=VdbeFrameMem(pFrame); pMem!=pEnd; pMem++){ 5770 pMem->flags = MEM_Undefined; 5771 pMem->db = db; 5772 } 5773 }else{ 5774 pFrame = pRt->u.pFrame; 5775 assert( pProgram->nMem+pProgram->nCsr==pFrame->nChildMem 5776 || (pProgram->nCsr==0 && pProgram->nMem+1==pFrame->nChildMem) ); 5777 assert( pProgram->nCsr==pFrame->nChildCsr ); 5778 assert( (int)(pOp - aOp)==pFrame->pc ); 5779 } 5780 5781 p->nFrame++; 5782 pFrame->pParent = p->pFrame; 5783 pFrame->lastRowid = lastRowid; 5784 pFrame->nChange = p->nChange; 5785 pFrame->nDbChange = p->db->nChange; 5786 assert( pFrame->pAuxData==0 ); 5787 pFrame->pAuxData = p->pAuxData; 5788 p->pAuxData = 0; 5789 p->nChange = 0; 5790 p->pFrame = pFrame; 5791 p->aMem = aMem = VdbeFrameMem(pFrame); 5792 p->nMem = pFrame->nChildMem; 5793 p->nCursor = (u16)pFrame->nChildCsr; 5794 p->apCsr = (VdbeCursor **)&aMem[p->nMem]; 5795 p->aOp = aOp = pProgram->aOp; 5796 p->nOp = pProgram->nOp; 5797 p->aOnceFlag = (u8 *)&p->apCsr[p->nCursor]; 5798 p->nOnceFlag = pProgram->nOnce; 5799 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS 5800 p->anExec = 0; 5801 #endif 5802 pOp = &aOp[-1]; 5803 memset(p->aOnceFlag, 0, p->nOnceFlag); 5804 5805 break; 5806 } 5807 5808 /* Opcode: Param P1 P2 * * * 5809 ** 5810 ** This opcode is only ever present in sub-programs called via the 5811 ** OP_Program instruction. Copy a value currently stored in a memory 5812 ** cell of the calling (parent) frame to cell P2 in the current frames 5813 ** address space. This is used by trigger programs to access the new.* 5814 ** and old.* values. 5815 ** 5816 ** The address of the cell in the parent frame is determined by adding 5817 ** the value of the P1 argument to the value of the P1 argument to the 5818 ** calling OP_Program instruction. 5819 */ 5820 case OP_Param: { /* out2 */ 5821 VdbeFrame *pFrame; 5822 Mem *pIn; 5823 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 5824 pFrame = p->pFrame; 5825 pIn = &pFrame->aMem[pOp->p1 + pFrame->aOp[pFrame->pc].p1]; 5826 sqlite3VdbeMemShallowCopy(pOut, pIn, MEM_Ephem); 5827 break; 5828 } 5829 5830 #endif /* #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER */ 5831 5832 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY 5833 /* Opcode: FkCounter P1 P2 * * * 5834 ** Synopsis: fkctr[P1]+=P2 5835 ** 5836 ** Increment a "constraint counter" by P2 (P2 may be negative or positive). 5837 ** If P1 is non-zero, the database constraint counter is incremented 5838 ** (deferred foreign key constraints). Otherwise, if P1 is zero, the 5839 ** statement counter is incremented (immediate foreign key constraints). 5840 */ 5841 case OP_FkCounter: { 5842 if( db->flags & SQLITE_DeferFKs ){ 5843 db->nDeferredImmCons += pOp->p2; 5844 }else if( pOp->p1 ){ 5845 db->nDeferredCons += pOp->p2; 5846 }else{ 5847 p->nFkConstraint += pOp->p2; 5848 } 5849 break; 5850 } 5851 5852 /* Opcode: FkIfZero P1 P2 * * * 5853 ** Synopsis: if fkctr[P1]==0 goto P2 5854 ** 5855 ** This opcode tests if a foreign key constraint-counter is currently zero. 5856 ** If so, jump to instruction P2. Otherwise, fall through to the next 5857 ** instruction. 5858 ** 5859 ** If P1 is non-zero, then the jump is taken if the database constraint-counter 5860 ** is zero (the one that counts deferred constraint violations). If P1 is 5861 ** zero, the jump is taken if the statement constraint-counter is zero 5862 ** (immediate foreign key constraint violations). 5863 */ 5864 case OP_FkIfZero: { /* jump */ 5865 if( pOp->p1 ){ 5866 VdbeBranchTaken(db->nDeferredCons==0 && db->nDeferredImmCons==0, 2); 5867 if( db->nDeferredCons==0 && db->nDeferredImmCons==0 ) goto jump_to_p2; 5868 }else{ 5869 VdbeBranchTaken(p->nFkConstraint==0 && db->nDeferredImmCons==0, 2); 5870 if( p->nFkConstraint==0 && db->nDeferredImmCons==0 ) goto jump_to_p2; 5871 } 5872 break; 5873 } 5874 #endif /* #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY */ 5875 5876 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOINCREMENT 5877 /* Opcode: MemMax P1 P2 * * * 5878 ** Synopsis: r[P1]=max(r[P1],r[P2]) 5879 ** 5880 ** P1 is a register in the root frame of this VM (the root frame is 5881 ** different from the current frame if this instruction is being executed 5882 ** within a sub-program). Set the value of register P1 to the maximum of 5883 ** its current value and the value in register P2. 5884 ** 5885 ** This instruction throws an error if the memory cell is not initially 5886 ** an integer. 5887 */ 5888 case OP_MemMax: { /* in2 */ 5889 VdbeFrame *pFrame; 5890 if( p->pFrame ){ 5891 for(pFrame=p->pFrame; pFrame->pParent; pFrame=pFrame->pParent); 5892 pIn1 = &pFrame->aMem[pOp->p1]; 5893 }else{ 5894 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 5895 } 5896 assert( memIsValid(pIn1) ); 5897 sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pIn1); 5898 pIn2 = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 5899 sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pIn2); 5900 if( pIn1->u.i<pIn2->u.i){ 5901 pIn1->u.i = pIn2->u.i; 5902 } 5903 break; 5904 } 5905 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOINCREMENT */ 5906 5907 /* Opcode: IfPos P1 P2 P3 * * 5908 ** Synopsis: if r[P1]>0 then r[P1]-=P3, goto P2 5909 ** 5910 ** Register P1 must contain an integer. 5911 ** If the value of register P1 is 1 or greater, subtract P3 from the 5912 ** value in P1 and jump to P2. 5913 ** 5914 ** If the initial value of register P1 is less than 1, then the 5915 ** value is unchanged and control passes through to the next instruction. 5916 */ 5917 case OP_IfPos: { /* jump, in1 */ 5918 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 5919 assert( pIn1->flags&MEM_Int ); 5920 VdbeBranchTaken( pIn1->u.i>0, 2); 5921 if( pIn1->u.i>0 ){ 5922 pIn1->u.i -= pOp->p3; 5923 goto jump_to_p2; 5924 } 5925 break; 5926 } 5927 5928 /* Opcode: OffsetLimit P1 P2 P3 * * 5929 ** Synopsis: if r[P1]>0 then r[P2]=r[P1]+max(0,r[P3]) else r[P2]=(-1) 5930 ** 5931 ** This opcode performs a commonly used computation associated with 5932 ** LIMIT and OFFSET process. r[P1] holds the limit counter. r[P3] 5933 ** holds the offset counter. The opcode computes the combined value 5934 ** of the LIMIT and OFFSET and stores that value in r[P2]. The r[P2] 5935 ** value computed is the total number of rows that will need to be 5936 ** visited in order to complete the query. 5937 ** 5938 ** If r[P3] is zero or negative, that means there is no OFFSET 5939 ** and r[P2] is set to be the value of the LIMIT, r[P1]. 5940 ** 5941 ** if r[P1] is zero or negative, that means there is no LIMIT 5942 ** and r[P2] is set to -1. 5943 ** 5944 ** Otherwise, r[P2] is set to the sum of r[P1] and r[P3]. 5945 */ 5946 case OP_OffsetLimit: { /* in1, out2, in3 */ 5947 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 5948 pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 5949 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 5950 assert( pIn1->flags & MEM_Int ); 5951 assert( pIn3->flags & MEM_Int ); 5952 pOut->u.i = pIn1->u.i<=0 ? -1 : pIn1->u.i+(pIn3->u.i>0?pIn3->u.i:0); 5953 break; 5954 } 5955 5956 /* Opcode: IfNotZero P1 P2 P3 * * 5957 ** Synopsis: if r[P1]!=0 then r[P1]-=P3, goto P2 5958 ** 5959 ** Register P1 must contain an integer. If the content of register P1 is 5960 ** initially nonzero, then subtract P3 from the value in register P1 and 5961 ** jump to P2. If register P1 is initially zero, leave it unchanged 5962 ** and fall through. 5963 */ 5964 case OP_IfNotZero: { /* jump, in1 */ 5965 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 5966 assert( pIn1->flags&MEM_Int ); 5967 VdbeBranchTaken(pIn1->u.i<0, 2); 5968 if( pIn1->u.i ){ 5969 pIn1->u.i -= pOp->p3; 5970 goto jump_to_p2; 5971 } 5972 break; 5973 } 5974 5975 /* Opcode: DecrJumpZero P1 P2 * * * 5976 ** Synopsis: if (--r[P1])==0 goto P2 5977 ** 5978 ** Register P1 must hold an integer. Decrement the value in register P1 5979 ** then jump to P2 if the new value is exactly zero. 5980 */ 5981 case OP_DecrJumpZero: { /* jump, in1 */ 5982 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 5983 assert( pIn1->flags&MEM_Int ); 5984 pIn1->u.i--; 5985 VdbeBranchTaken(pIn1->u.i==0, 2); 5986 if( pIn1->u.i==0 ) goto jump_to_p2; 5987 break; 5988 } 5989 5990 5991 /* Opcode: AggStep0 * P2 P3 P4 P5 5992 ** Synopsis: accum=r[P3] step(r[P2@P5]) 5993 ** 5994 ** Execute the step function for an aggregate. The 5995 ** function has P5 arguments. P4 is a pointer to the FuncDef 5996 ** structure that specifies the function. Register P3 is the 5997 ** accumulator. 5998 ** 5999 ** The P5 arguments are taken from register P2 and its 6000 ** successors. 6001 */ 6002 /* Opcode: AggStep * P2 P3 P4 P5 6003 ** Synopsis: accum=r[P3] step(r[P2@P5]) 6004 ** 6005 ** Execute the step function for an aggregate. The 6006 ** function has P5 arguments. P4 is a pointer to an sqlite3_context 6007 ** object that is used to run the function. Register P3 is 6008 ** as the accumulator. 6009 ** 6010 ** The P5 arguments are taken from register P2 and its 6011 ** successors. 6012 ** 6013 ** This opcode is initially coded as OP_AggStep0. On first evaluation, 6014 ** the FuncDef stored in P4 is converted into an sqlite3_context and 6015 ** the opcode is changed. In this way, the initialization of the 6016 ** sqlite3_context only happens once, instead of on each call to the 6017 ** step function. 6018 */ 6019 case OP_AggStep0: { 6020 int n; 6021 sqlite3_context *pCtx; 6022 6023 assert( pOp->p4type==P4_FUNCDEF ); 6024 n = pOp->p5; 6025 assert( pOp->p3>0 && pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); 6026 assert( n==0 || (pOp->p2>0 && pOp->p2+n<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)+1) ); 6027 assert( pOp->p3<pOp->p2 || pOp->p3>=pOp->p2+n ); 6028 pCtx = sqlite3DbMallocRawNN(db, sizeof(*pCtx) + (n-1)*sizeof(sqlite3_value*)); 6029 if( pCtx==0 ) goto no_mem; 6030 pCtx->pMem = 0; 6031 pCtx->pFunc = pOp->p4.pFunc; 6032 pCtx->iOp = (int)(pOp - aOp); 6033 pCtx->pVdbe = p; 6034 pCtx->argc = n; 6035 pOp->p4type = P4_FUNCCTX; 6036 pOp->p4.pCtx = pCtx; 6037 pOp->opcode = OP_AggStep; 6038 /* Fall through into OP_AggStep */ 6039 } 6040 case OP_AggStep: { 6041 int i; 6042 sqlite3_context *pCtx; 6043 Mem *pMem; 6044 Mem t; 6045 6046 assert( pOp->p4type==P4_FUNCCTX ); 6047 pCtx = pOp->p4.pCtx; 6048 pMem = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 6049 6050 /* If this function is inside of a trigger, the register array in aMem[] 6051 ** might change from one evaluation to the next. The next block of code 6052 ** checks to see if the register array has changed, and if so it 6053 ** reinitializes the relavant parts of the sqlite3_context object */ 6054 if( pCtx->pMem != pMem ){ 6055 pCtx->pMem = pMem; 6056 for(i=pCtx->argc-1; i>=0; i--) pCtx->argv[i] = &aMem[pOp->p2+i]; 6057 } 6058 6059 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 6060 for(i=0; i<pCtx->argc; i++){ 6061 assert( memIsValid(pCtx->argv[i]) ); 6062 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p2+i, pCtx->argv[i]); 6063 } 6064 #endif 6065 6066 pMem->n++; 6067 sqlite3VdbeMemInit(&t, db, MEM_Null); 6068 pCtx->pOut = &t; 6069 pCtx->fErrorOrAux = 0; 6070 pCtx->skipFlag = 0; 6071 (pCtx->pFunc->xSFunc)(pCtx,pCtx->argc,pCtx->argv); /* IMP: R-24505-23230 */ 6072 if( pCtx->fErrorOrAux ){ 6073 if( pCtx->isError ){ 6074 sqlite3VdbeError(p, "%s", sqlite3_value_text(&t)); 6075 rc = pCtx->isError; 6076 } 6077 sqlite3VdbeMemRelease(&t); 6078 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 6079 }else{ 6080 assert( t.flags==MEM_Null ); 6081 } 6082 if( pCtx->skipFlag ){ 6083 assert( pOp[-1].opcode==OP_CollSeq ); 6084 i = pOp[-1].p1; 6085 if( i ) sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(&aMem[i], 1); 6086 } 6087 break; 6088 } 6089 6090 /* Opcode: AggFinal P1 P2 * P4 * 6091 ** Synopsis: accum=r[P1] N=P2 6092 ** 6093 ** Execute the finalizer function for an aggregate. P1 is 6094 ** the memory location that is the accumulator for the aggregate. 6095 ** 6096 ** P2 is the number of arguments that the step function takes and 6097 ** P4 is a pointer to the FuncDef for this function. The P2 6098 ** argument is not used by this opcode. It is only there to disambiguate 6099 ** functions that can take varying numbers of arguments. The 6100 ** P4 argument is only needed for the degenerate case where 6101 ** the step function was not previously called. 6102 */ 6103 case OP_AggFinal: { 6104 Mem *pMem; 6105 assert( pOp->p1>0 && pOp->p1<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); 6106 pMem = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 6107 assert( (pMem->flags & ~(MEM_Null|MEM_Agg))==0 ); 6108 rc = sqlite3VdbeMemFinalize(pMem, pOp->p4.pFunc); 6109 if( rc ){ 6110 sqlite3VdbeError(p, "%s", sqlite3_value_text(pMem)); 6111 goto abort_due_to_error; 6112 } 6113 sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(pMem, encoding); 6114 UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pMem); 6115 if( sqlite3VdbeMemTooBig(pMem) ){ 6116 goto too_big; 6117 } 6118 break; 6119 } 6120 6121 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL 6122 /* Opcode: Checkpoint P1 P2 P3 * * 6123 ** 6124 ** Checkpoint database P1. This is a no-op if P1 is not currently in 6125 ** WAL mode. Parameter P2 is one of SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE, FULL, 6126 ** RESTART, or TRUNCATE. Write 1 or 0 into mem[P3] if the checkpoint returns 6127 ** SQLITE_BUSY or not, respectively. Write the number of pages in the 6128 ** WAL after the checkpoint into mem[P3+1] and the number of pages 6129 ** in the WAL that have been checkpointed after the checkpoint 6130 ** completes into mem[P3+2]. However on an error, mem[P3+1] and 6131 ** mem[P3+2] are initialized to -1. 6132 */ 6133 case OP_Checkpoint: { 6134 int i; /* Loop counter */ 6135 int aRes[3]; /* Results */ 6136 Mem *pMem; /* Write results here */ 6137 6138 assert( p->readOnly==0 ); 6139 aRes[0] = 0; 6140 aRes[1] = aRes[2] = -1; 6141 assert( pOp->p2==SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE 6142 || pOp->p2==SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_FULL 6143 || pOp->p2==SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_RESTART 6144 || pOp->p2==SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_TRUNCATE 6145 ); 6146 rc = sqlite3Checkpoint(db, pOp->p1, pOp->p2, &aRes[1], &aRes[2]); 6147 if( rc ){ 6148 if( rc!=SQLITE_BUSY ) goto abort_due_to_error; 6149 rc = SQLITE_OK; 6150 aRes[0] = 1; 6151 } 6152 for(i=0, pMem = &aMem[pOp->p3]; i<3; i++, pMem++){ 6153 sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pMem, (i64)aRes[i]); 6154 } 6155 break; 6156 }; 6157 #endif 6158 6159 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PRAGMA 6160 /* Opcode: JournalMode P1 P2 P3 * * 6161 ** 6162 ** Change the journal mode of database P1 to P3. P3 must be one of the 6163 ** PAGER_JOURNALMODE_XXX values. If changing between the various rollback 6164 ** modes (delete, truncate, persist, off and memory), this is a simple 6165 ** operation. No IO is required. 6166 ** 6167 ** If changing into or out of WAL mode the procedure is more complicated. 6168 ** 6169 ** Write a string containing the final journal-mode to register P2. 6170 */ 6171 case OP_JournalMode: { /* out2 */ 6172 Btree *pBt; /* Btree to change journal mode of */ 6173 Pager *pPager; /* Pager associated with pBt */ 6174 int eNew; /* New journal mode */ 6175 int eOld; /* The old journal mode */ 6176 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL 6177 const char *zFilename; /* Name of database file for pPager */ 6178 #endif 6179 6180 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 6181 eNew = pOp->p3; 6182 assert( eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_DELETE 6183 || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_TRUNCATE 6184 || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_PERSIST 6185 || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF 6186 || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY 6187 || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL 6188 || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_QUERY 6189 ); 6190 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb ); 6191 assert( p->readOnly==0 ); 6192 6193 pBt = db->aDb[pOp->p1].pBt; 6194 pPager = sqlite3BtreePager(pBt); 6195 eOld = sqlite3PagerGetJournalMode(pPager); 6196 if( eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_QUERY ) eNew = eOld; 6197 if( !sqlite3PagerOkToChangeJournalMode(pPager) ) eNew = eOld; 6198 6199 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL 6200 zFilename = sqlite3PagerFilename(pPager, 1); 6201 6202 /* Do not allow a transition to journal_mode=WAL for a database 6203 ** in temporary storage or if the VFS does not support shared memory 6204 */ 6205 if( eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL 6206 && (sqlite3Strlen30(zFilename)==0 /* Temp file */ 6207 || !sqlite3PagerWalSupported(pPager)) /* No shared-memory support */ 6208 ){ 6209 eNew = eOld; 6210 } 6211 6212 if( (eNew!=eOld) 6213 && (eOld==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL) 6214 ){ 6215 if( !db->autoCommit || db->nVdbeRead>1 ){ 6216 rc = SQLITE_ERROR; 6217 sqlite3VdbeError(p, 6218 "cannot change %s wal mode from within a transaction", 6219 (eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL ? "into" : "out of") 6220 ); 6221 goto abort_due_to_error; 6222 }else{ 6223 6224 if( eOld==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL ){ 6225 /* If leaving WAL mode, close the log file. If successful, the call 6226 ** to PagerCloseWal() checkpoints and deletes the write-ahead-log 6227 ** file. An EXCLUSIVE lock may still be held on the database file 6228 ** after a successful return. 6229 */ 6230 rc = sqlite3PagerCloseWal(pPager); 6231 if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ 6232 sqlite3PagerSetJournalMode(pPager, eNew); 6233 } 6234 }else if( eOld==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY ){ 6235 /* Cannot transition directly from MEMORY to WAL. Use mode OFF 6236 ** as an intermediate */ 6237 sqlite3PagerSetJournalMode(pPager, PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF); 6238 } 6239 6240 /* Open a transaction on the database file. Regardless of the journal 6241 ** mode, this transaction always uses a rollback journal. 6242 */ 6243 assert( sqlite3BtreeIsInTrans(pBt)==0 ); 6244 if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ 6245 rc = sqlite3BtreeSetVersion(pBt, (eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL ? 2 : 1)); 6246 } 6247 } 6248 } 6249 #endif /* ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL */ 6250 6251 if( rc ) eNew = eOld; 6252 eNew = sqlite3PagerSetJournalMode(pPager, eNew); 6253 6254 pOut->flags = MEM_Str|MEM_Static|MEM_Term; 6255 pOut->z = (char *)sqlite3JournalModename(eNew); 6256 pOut->n = sqlite3Strlen30(pOut->z); 6257 pOut->enc = SQLITE_UTF8; 6258 sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(pOut, encoding); 6259 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 6260 break; 6261 }; 6262 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_PRAGMA */ 6263 6264 #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_VACUUM) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_ATTACH) 6265 /* Opcode: Vacuum * * * * * 6266 ** 6267 ** Vacuum the entire database. This opcode will cause other virtual 6268 ** machines to be created and run. It may not be called from within 6269 ** a transaction. 6270 */ 6271 case OP_Vacuum: { 6272 assert( p->readOnly==0 ); 6273 rc = sqlite3RunVacuum(&p->zErrMsg, db); 6274 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 6275 break; 6276 } 6277 #endif 6278 6279 #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM) 6280 /* Opcode: IncrVacuum P1 P2 * * * 6281 ** 6282 ** Perform a single step of the incremental vacuum procedure on 6283 ** the P1 database. If the vacuum has finished, jump to instruction 6284 ** P2. Otherwise, fall through to the next instruction. 6285 */ 6286 case OP_IncrVacuum: { /* jump */ 6287 Btree *pBt; 6288 6289 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb ); 6290 assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, pOp->p1) ); 6291 assert( p->readOnly==0 ); 6292 pBt = db->aDb[pOp->p1].pBt; 6293 rc = sqlite3BtreeIncrVacuum(pBt); 6294 VdbeBranchTaken(rc==SQLITE_DONE,2); 6295 if( rc ){ 6296 if( rc!=SQLITE_DONE ) goto abort_due_to_error; 6297 rc = SQLITE_OK; 6298 goto jump_to_p2; 6299 } 6300 break; 6301 } 6302 #endif 6303 6304 /* Opcode: Expire P1 * * * * 6305 ** 6306 ** Cause precompiled statements to expire. When an expired statement 6307 ** is executed using sqlite3_step() it will either automatically 6308 ** reprepare itself (if it was originally created using sqlite3_prepare_v2()) 6309 ** or it will fail with SQLITE_SCHEMA. 6310 ** 6311 ** If P1 is 0, then all SQL statements become expired. If P1 is non-zero, 6312 ** then only the currently executing statement is expired. 6313 */ 6314 case OP_Expire: { 6315 if( !pOp->p1 ){ 6316 sqlite3ExpirePreparedStatements(db); 6317 }else{ 6318 p->expired = 1; 6319 } 6320 break; 6321 } 6322 6323 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE 6324 /* Opcode: TableLock P1 P2 P3 P4 * 6325 ** Synopsis: iDb=P1 root=P2 write=P3 6326 ** 6327 ** Obtain a lock on a particular table. This instruction is only used when 6328 ** the shared-cache feature is enabled. 6329 ** 6330 ** P1 is the index of the database in sqlite3.aDb[] of the database 6331 ** on which the lock is acquired. A readlock is obtained if P3==0 or 6332 ** a write lock if P3==1. 6333 ** 6334 ** P2 contains the root-page of the table to lock. 6335 ** 6336 ** P4 contains a pointer to the name of the table being locked. This is only 6337 ** used to generate an error message if the lock cannot be obtained. 6338 */ 6339 case OP_TableLock: { 6340 u8 isWriteLock = (u8)pOp->p3; 6341 if( isWriteLock || 0==(db->flags&SQLITE_ReadUncommitted) ){ 6342 int p1 = pOp->p1; 6343 assert( p1>=0 && p1<db->nDb ); 6344 assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, p1) ); 6345 assert( isWriteLock==0 || isWriteLock==1 ); 6346 rc = sqlite3BtreeLockTable(db->aDb[p1].pBt, pOp->p2, isWriteLock); 6347 if( rc ){ 6348 if( (rc&0xFF)==SQLITE_LOCKED ){ 6349 const char *z = pOp->p4.z; 6350 sqlite3VdbeError(p, "database table is locked: %s", z); 6351 } 6352 goto abort_due_to_error; 6353 } 6354 } 6355 break; 6356 } 6357 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE */ 6358 6359 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE 6360 /* Opcode: VBegin * * * P4 * 6361 ** 6362 ** P4 may be a pointer to an sqlite3_vtab structure. If so, call the 6363 ** xBegin method for that table. 6364 ** 6365 ** Also, whether or not P4 is set, check that this is not being called from 6366 ** within a callback to a virtual table xSync() method. If it is, the error 6367 ** code will be set to SQLITE_LOCKED. 6368 */ 6369 case OP_VBegin: { 6370 VTable *pVTab; 6371 pVTab = pOp->p4.pVtab; 6372 rc = sqlite3VtabBegin(db, pVTab); 6373 if( pVTab ) sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(p, pVTab->pVtab); 6374 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 6375 break; 6376 } 6377 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ 6378 6379 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE 6380 /* Opcode: VCreate P1 P2 * * * 6381 ** 6382 ** P2 is a register that holds the name of a virtual table in database 6383 ** P1. Call the xCreate method for that table. 6384 */ 6385 case OP_VCreate: { 6386 Mem sMem; /* For storing the record being decoded */ 6387 const char *zTab; /* Name of the virtual table */ 6388 6389 memset(&sMem, 0, sizeof(sMem)); 6390 sMem.db = db; 6391 /* Because P2 is always a static string, it is impossible for the 6392 ** sqlite3VdbeMemCopy() to fail */ 6393 assert( (aMem[pOp->p2].flags & MEM_Str)!=0 ); 6394 assert( (aMem[pOp->p2].flags & MEM_Static)!=0 ); 6395 rc = sqlite3VdbeMemCopy(&sMem, &aMem[pOp->p2]); 6396 assert( rc==SQLITE_OK ); 6397 zTab = (const char*)sqlite3_value_text(&sMem); 6398 assert( zTab || db->mallocFailed ); 6399 if( zTab ){ 6400 rc = sqlite3VtabCallCreate(db, pOp->p1, zTab, &p->zErrMsg); 6401 } 6402 sqlite3VdbeMemRelease(&sMem); 6403 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 6404 break; 6405 } 6406 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ 6407 6408 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE 6409 /* Opcode: VDestroy P1 * * P4 * 6410 ** 6411 ** P4 is the name of a virtual table in database P1. Call the xDestroy method 6412 ** of that table. 6413 */ 6414 case OP_VDestroy: { 6415 db->nVDestroy++; 6416 rc = sqlite3VtabCallDestroy(db, pOp->p1, pOp->p4.z); 6417 db->nVDestroy--; 6418 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 6419 break; 6420 } 6421 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ 6422 6423 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE 6424 /* Opcode: VOpen P1 * * P4 * 6425 ** 6426 ** P4 is a pointer to a virtual table object, an sqlite3_vtab structure. 6427 ** P1 is a cursor number. This opcode opens a cursor to the virtual 6428 ** table and stores that cursor in P1. 6429 */ 6430 case OP_VOpen: { 6431 VdbeCursor *pCur; 6432 sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVCur; 6433 sqlite3_vtab *pVtab; 6434 const sqlite3_module *pModule; 6435 6436 assert( p->bIsReader ); 6437 pCur = 0; 6438 pVCur = 0; 6439 pVtab = pOp->p4.pVtab->pVtab; 6440 if( pVtab==0 || NEVER(pVtab->pModule==0) ){ 6441 rc = SQLITE_LOCKED; 6442 goto abort_due_to_error; 6443 } 6444 pModule = pVtab->pModule; 6445 rc = pModule->xOpen(pVtab, &pVCur); 6446 sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(p, pVtab); 6447 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 6448 6449 /* Initialize sqlite3_vtab_cursor base class */ 6450 pVCur->pVtab = pVtab; 6451 6452 /* Initialize vdbe cursor object */ 6453 pCur = allocateCursor(p, pOp->p1, 0, -1, CURTYPE_VTAB); 6454 if( pCur ){ 6455 pCur->uc.pVCur = pVCur; 6456 pVtab->nRef++; 6457 }else{ 6458 assert( db->mallocFailed ); 6459 pModule->xClose(pVCur); 6460 goto no_mem; 6461 } 6462 break; 6463 } 6464 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ 6465 6466 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE 6467 /* Opcode: VFilter P1 P2 P3 P4 * 6468 ** Synopsis: iplan=r[P3] zplan='P4' 6469 ** 6470 ** P1 is a cursor opened using VOpen. P2 is an address to jump to if 6471 ** the filtered result set is empty. 6472 ** 6473 ** P4 is either NULL or a string that was generated by the xBestIndex 6474 ** method of the module. The interpretation of the P4 string is left 6475 ** to the module implementation. 6476 ** 6477 ** This opcode invokes the xFilter method on the virtual table specified 6478 ** by P1. The integer query plan parameter to xFilter is stored in register 6479 ** P3. Register P3+1 stores the argc parameter to be passed to the 6480 ** xFilter method. Registers P3+2..P3+1+argc are the argc 6481 ** additional parameters which are passed to 6482 ** xFilter as argv. Register P3+2 becomes argv[0] when passed to xFilter. 6483 ** 6484 ** A jump is made to P2 if the result set after filtering would be empty. 6485 */ 6486 case OP_VFilter: { /* jump */ 6487 int nArg; 6488 int iQuery; 6489 const sqlite3_module *pModule; 6490 Mem *pQuery; 6491 Mem *pArgc; 6492 sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVCur; 6493 sqlite3_vtab *pVtab; 6494 VdbeCursor *pCur; 6495 int res; 6496 int i; 6497 Mem **apArg; 6498 6499 pQuery = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 6500 pArgc = &pQuery[1]; 6501 pCur = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 6502 assert( memIsValid(pQuery) ); 6503 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, pQuery); 6504 assert( pCur->eCurType==CURTYPE_VTAB ); 6505 pVCur = pCur->uc.pVCur; 6506 pVtab = pVCur->pVtab; 6507 pModule = pVtab->pModule; 6508 6509 /* Grab the index number and argc parameters */ 6510 assert( (pQuery->flags&MEM_Int)!=0 && pArgc->flags==MEM_Int ); 6511 nArg = (int)pArgc->u.i; 6512 iQuery = (int)pQuery->u.i; 6513 6514 /* Invoke the xFilter method */ 6515 res = 0; 6516 apArg = p->apArg; 6517 for(i = 0; i<nArg; i++){ 6518 apArg[i] = &pArgc[i+1]; 6519 } 6520 rc = pModule->xFilter(pVCur, iQuery, pOp->p4.z, nArg, apArg); 6521 sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(p, pVtab); 6522 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 6523 res = pModule->xEof(pVCur); 6524 pCur->nullRow = 0; 6525 VdbeBranchTaken(res!=0,2); 6526 if( res ) goto jump_to_p2; 6527 break; 6528 } 6529 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ 6530 6531 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE 6532 /* Opcode: VColumn P1 P2 P3 * * 6533 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=vcolumn(P2) 6534 ** 6535 ** Store the value of the P2-th column of 6536 ** the row of the virtual-table that the 6537 ** P1 cursor is pointing to into register P3. 6538 */ 6539 case OP_VColumn: { 6540 sqlite3_vtab *pVtab; 6541 const sqlite3_module *pModule; 6542 Mem *pDest; 6543 sqlite3_context sContext; 6544 6545 VdbeCursor *pCur = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 6546 assert( pCur->eCurType==CURTYPE_VTAB ); 6547 assert( pOp->p3>0 && pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); 6548 pDest = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 6549 memAboutToChange(p, pDest); 6550 if( pCur->nullRow ){ 6551 sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pDest); 6552 break; 6553 } 6554 pVtab = pCur->uc.pVCur->pVtab; 6555 pModule = pVtab->pModule; 6556 assert( pModule->xColumn ); 6557 memset(&sContext, 0, sizeof(sContext)); 6558 sContext.pOut = pDest; 6559 MemSetTypeFlag(pDest, MEM_Null); 6560 rc = pModule->xColumn(pCur->uc.pVCur, &sContext, pOp->p2); 6561 sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(p, pVtab); 6562 if( sContext.isError ){ 6563 rc = sContext.isError; 6564 } 6565 sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(pDest, encoding); 6566 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, pDest); 6567 UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pDest); 6568 6569 if( sqlite3VdbeMemTooBig(pDest) ){ 6570 goto too_big; 6571 } 6572 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 6573 break; 6574 } 6575 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ 6576 6577 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE 6578 /* Opcode: VNext P1 P2 * * * 6579 ** 6580 ** Advance virtual table P1 to the next row in its result set and 6581 ** jump to instruction P2. Or, if the virtual table has reached 6582 ** the end of its result set, then fall through to the next instruction. 6583 */ 6584 case OP_VNext: { /* jump */ 6585 sqlite3_vtab *pVtab; 6586 const sqlite3_module *pModule; 6587 int res; 6588 VdbeCursor *pCur; 6589 6590 res = 0; 6591 pCur = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 6592 assert( pCur->eCurType==CURTYPE_VTAB ); 6593 if( pCur->nullRow ){ 6594 break; 6595 } 6596 pVtab = pCur->uc.pVCur->pVtab; 6597 pModule = pVtab->pModule; 6598 assert( pModule->xNext ); 6599 6600 /* Invoke the xNext() method of the module. There is no way for the 6601 ** underlying implementation to return an error if one occurs during 6602 ** xNext(). Instead, if an error occurs, true is returned (indicating that 6603 ** data is available) and the error code returned when xColumn or 6604 ** some other method is next invoked on the save virtual table cursor. 6605 */ 6606 rc = pModule->xNext(pCur->uc.pVCur); 6607 sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(p, pVtab); 6608 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 6609 res = pModule->xEof(pCur->uc.pVCur); 6610 VdbeBranchTaken(!res,2); 6611 if( !res ){ 6612 /* If there is data, jump to P2 */ 6613 goto jump_to_p2_and_check_for_interrupt; 6614 } 6615 goto check_for_interrupt; 6616 } 6617 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ 6618 6619 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE 6620 /* Opcode: VRename P1 * * P4 * 6621 ** 6622 ** P4 is a pointer to a virtual table object, an sqlite3_vtab structure. 6623 ** This opcode invokes the corresponding xRename method. The value 6624 ** in register P1 is passed as the zName argument to the xRename method. 6625 */ 6626 case OP_VRename: { 6627 sqlite3_vtab *pVtab; 6628 Mem *pName; 6629 6630 pVtab = pOp->p4.pVtab->pVtab; 6631 pName = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 6632 assert( pVtab->pModule->xRename ); 6633 assert( memIsValid(pName) ); 6634 assert( p->readOnly==0 ); 6635 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p1, pName); 6636 assert( pName->flags & MEM_Str ); 6637 testcase( pName->enc==SQLITE_UTF8 ); 6638 testcase( pName->enc==SQLITE_UTF16BE ); 6639 testcase( pName->enc==SQLITE_UTF16LE ); 6640 rc = sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(pName, SQLITE_UTF8); 6641 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 6642 rc = pVtab->pModule->xRename(pVtab, pName->z); 6643 sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(p, pVtab); 6644 p->expired = 0; 6645 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 6646 break; 6647 } 6648 #endif 6649 6650 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE 6651 /* Opcode: VUpdate P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 6652 ** Synopsis: data=r[P3@P2] 6653 ** 6654 ** P4 is a pointer to a virtual table object, an sqlite3_vtab structure. 6655 ** This opcode invokes the corresponding xUpdate method. P2 values 6656 ** are contiguous memory cells starting at P3 to pass to the xUpdate 6657 ** invocation. The value in register (P3+P2-1) corresponds to the 6658 ** p2th element of the argv array passed to xUpdate. 6659 ** 6660 ** The xUpdate method will do a DELETE or an INSERT or both. 6661 ** The argv[0] element (which corresponds to memory cell P3) 6662 ** is the rowid of a row to delete. If argv[0] is NULL then no 6663 ** deletion occurs. The argv[1] element is the rowid of the new 6664 ** row. This can be NULL to have the virtual table select the new 6665 ** rowid for itself. The subsequent elements in the array are 6666 ** the values of columns in the new row. 6667 ** 6668 ** If P2==1 then no insert is performed. argv[0] is the rowid of 6669 ** a row to delete. 6670 ** 6671 ** P1 is a boolean flag. If it is set to true and the xUpdate call 6672 ** is successful, then the value returned by sqlite3_last_insert_rowid() 6673 ** is set to the value of the rowid for the row just inserted. 6674 ** 6675 ** P5 is the error actions (OE_Replace, OE_Fail, OE_Ignore, etc) to 6676 ** apply in the case of a constraint failure on an insert or update. 6677 */ 6678 case OP_VUpdate: { 6679 sqlite3_vtab *pVtab; 6680 const sqlite3_module *pModule; 6681 int nArg; 6682 int i; 6683 sqlite_int64 rowid; 6684 Mem **apArg; 6685 Mem *pX; 6686 6687 assert( pOp->p2==1 || pOp->p5==OE_Fail || pOp->p5==OE_Rollback 6688 || pOp->p5==OE_Abort || pOp->p5==OE_Ignore || pOp->p5==OE_Replace 6689 ); 6690 assert( p->readOnly==0 ); 6691 pVtab = pOp->p4.pVtab->pVtab; 6692 if( pVtab==0 || NEVER(pVtab->pModule==0) ){ 6693 rc = SQLITE_LOCKED; 6694 goto abort_due_to_error; 6695 } 6696 pModule = pVtab->pModule; 6697 nArg = pOp->p2; 6698 assert( pOp->p4type==P4_VTAB ); 6699 if( ALWAYS(pModule->xUpdate) ){ 6700 u8 vtabOnConflict = db->vtabOnConflict; 6701 apArg = p->apArg; 6702 pX = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 6703 for(i=0; i<nArg; i++){ 6704 assert( memIsValid(pX) ); 6705 memAboutToChange(p, pX); 6706 apArg[i] = pX; 6707 pX++; 6708 } 6709 db->vtabOnConflict = pOp->p5; 6710 rc = pModule->xUpdate(pVtab, nArg, apArg, &rowid); 6711 db->vtabOnConflict = vtabOnConflict; 6712 sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(p, pVtab); 6713 if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pOp->p1 ){ 6714 assert( nArg>1 && apArg[0] && (apArg[0]->flags&MEM_Null) ); 6715 db->lastRowid = lastRowid = rowid; 6716 } 6717 if( (rc&0xff)==SQLITE_CONSTRAINT && pOp->p4.pVtab->bConstraint ){ 6718 if( pOp->p5==OE_Ignore ){ 6719 rc = SQLITE_OK; 6720 }else{ 6721 p->errorAction = ((pOp->p5==OE_Replace) ? OE_Abort : pOp->p5); 6722 } 6723 }else{ 6724 p->nChange++; 6725 } 6726 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 6727 } 6728 break; 6729 } 6730 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ 6731 6732 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PAGER_PRAGMAS 6733 /* Opcode: Pagecount P1 P2 * * * 6734 ** 6735 ** Write the current number of pages in database P1 to memory cell P2. 6736 */ 6737 case OP_Pagecount: { /* out2 */ 6738 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 6739 pOut->u.i = sqlite3BtreeLastPage(db->aDb[pOp->p1].pBt); 6740 break; 6741 } 6742 #endif 6743 6744 6745 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PAGER_PRAGMAS 6746 /* Opcode: MaxPgcnt P1 P2 P3 * * 6747 ** 6748 ** Try to set the maximum page count for database P1 to the value in P3. 6749 ** Do not let the maximum page count fall below the current page count and 6750 ** do not change the maximum page count value if P3==0. 6751 ** 6752 ** Store the maximum page count after the change in register P2. 6753 */ 6754 case OP_MaxPgcnt: { /* out2 */ 6755 unsigned int newMax; 6756 Btree *pBt; 6757 6758 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 6759 pBt = db->aDb[pOp->p1].pBt; 6760 newMax = 0; 6761 if( pOp->p3 ){ 6762 newMax = sqlite3BtreeLastPage(pBt); 6763 if( newMax < (unsigned)pOp->p3 ) newMax = (unsigned)pOp->p3; 6764 } 6765 pOut->u.i = sqlite3BtreeMaxPageCount(pBt, newMax); 6766 break; 6767 } 6768 #endif 6769 6770 6771 /* Opcode: Init * P2 * P4 * 6772 ** Synopsis: Start at P2 6773 ** 6774 ** Programs contain a single instance of this opcode as the very first 6775 ** opcode. 6776 ** 6777 ** If tracing is enabled (by the sqlite3_trace()) interface, then 6778 ** the UTF-8 string contained in P4 is emitted on the trace callback. 6779 ** Or if P4 is blank, use the string returned by sqlite3_sql(). 6780 ** 6781 ** If P2 is not zero, jump to instruction P2. 6782 */ 6783 case OP_Init: { /* jump */ 6784 char *zTrace; 6785 6786 /* If the P4 argument is not NULL, then it must be an SQL comment string. 6787 ** The "--" string is broken up to prevent false-positives with srcck1.c. 6788 ** 6789 ** This assert() provides evidence for: 6790 ** EVIDENCE-OF: R-50676-09860 The callback can compute the same text that 6791 ** would have been returned by the legacy sqlite3_trace() interface by 6792 ** using the X argument when X begins with "--" and invoking 6793 ** sqlite3_expanded_sql(P) otherwise. 6794 */ 6795 assert( pOp->p4.z==0 || strncmp(pOp->p4.z, "-" "- ", 3)==0 ); 6796 6797 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRACE 6798 if( (db->mTrace & (SQLITE_TRACE_STMT|SQLITE_TRACE_LEGACY))!=0 6799 && !p->doingRerun 6800 && (zTrace = (pOp->p4.z ? pOp->p4.z : p->zSql))!=0 6801 ){ 6802 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_DEPRECATED 6803 if( db->mTrace & SQLITE_TRACE_LEGACY ){ 6804 void (*x)(void*,const char*) = (void(*)(void*,const char*))db->xTrace; 6805 char *z = sqlite3VdbeExpandSql(p, zTrace); 6806 x(db->pTraceArg, z); 6807 sqlite3_free(z); 6808 }else 6809 #endif 6810 { 6811 (void)db->xTrace(SQLITE_TRACE_STMT, db->pTraceArg, p, zTrace); 6812 } 6813 } 6814 #ifdef SQLITE_USE_FCNTL_TRACE 6815 zTrace = (pOp->p4.z ? pOp->p4.z : p->zSql); 6816 if( zTrace ){ 6817 int i; 6818 for(i=0; i<db->nDb; i++){ 6819 if( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, i)==0 ) continue; 6820 sqlite3_file_control(db, db->aDb[i].zName, SQLITE_FCNTL_TRACE, zTrace); 6821 } 6822 } 6823 #endif /* SQLITE_USE_FCNTL_TRACE */ 6824 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 6825 if( (db->flags & SQLITE_SqlTrace)!=0 6826 && (zTrace = (pOp->p4.z ? pOp->p4.z : p->zSql))!=0 6827 ){ 6828 sqlite3DebugPrintf("SQL-trace: %s\n", zTrace); 6829 } 6830 #endif /* SQLITE_DEBUG */ 6831 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_TRACE */ 6832 if( pOp->p2 ) goto jump_to_p2; 6833 break; 6834 } 6835 6836 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_CURSOR_HINTS 6837 /* Opcode: CursorHint P1 * * P4 * 6838 ** 6839 ** Provide a hint to cursor P1 that it only needs to return rows that 6840 ** satisfy the Expr in P4. TK_REGISTER terms in the P4 expression refer 6841 ** to values currently held in registers. TK_COLUMN terms in the P4 6842 ** expression refer to columns in the b-tree to which cursor P1 is pointing. 6843 */ 6844 case OP_CursorHint: { 6845 VdbeCursor *pC; 6846 6847 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 6848 assert( pOp->p4type==P4_EXPR ); 6849 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 6850 if( pC ){ 6851 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 6852 sqlite3BtreeCursorHint(pC->uc.pCursor, BTREE_HINT_RANGE, 6853 pOp->p4.pExpr, aMem); 6854 } 6855 break; 6856 } 6857 #endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_CURSOR_HINTS */ 6858 6859 /* Opcode: Noop * * * * * 6860 ** 6861 ** Do nothing. This instruction is often useful as a jump 6862 ** destination. 6863 */ 6864 /* 6865 ** The magic Explain opcode are only inserted when explain==2 (which 6866 ** is to say when the EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN syntax is used.) 6867 ** This opcode records information from the optimizer. It is the 6868 ** the same as a no-op. This opcodesnever appears in a real VM program. 6869 */ 6870 default: { /* This is really OP_Noop and OP_Explain */ 6871 assert( pOp->opcode==OP_Noop || pOp->opcode==OP_Explain ); 6872 break; 6873 } 6874 6875 /***************************************************************************** 6876 ** The cases of the switch statement above this line should all be indented 6877 ** by 6 spaces. But the left-most 6 spaces have been removed to improve the 6878 ** readability. From this point on down, the normal indentation rules are 6879 ** restored. 6880 *****************************************************************************/ 6881 } 6882 6883 #ifdef VDBE_PROFILE 6884 { 6885 u64 endTime = sqlite3Hwtime(); 6886 if( endTime>start ) pOrigOp->cycles += endTime - start; 6887 pOrigOp->cnt++; 6888 } 6889 #endif 6890 6891 /* The following code adds nothing to the actual functionality 6892 ** of the program. It is only here for testing and debugging. 6893 ** On the other hand, it does burn CPU cycles every time through 6894 ** the evaluator loop. So we can leave it out when NDEBUG is defined. 6895 */ 6896 #ifndef NDEBUG 6897 assert( pOp>=&aOp[-1] && pOp<&aOp[p->nOp-1] ); 6898 6899 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 6900 if( db->flags & SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){ 6901 u8 opProperty = sqlite3OpcodeProperty[pOrigOp->opcode]; 6902 if( rc!=0 ) printf("rc=%d\n",rc); 6903 if( opProperty & (OPFLG_OUT2) ){ 6904 registerTrace(pOrigOp->p2, &aMem[pOrigOp->p2]); 6905 } 6906 if( opProperty & OPFLG_OUT3 ){ 6907 registerTrace(pOrigOp->p3, &aMem[pOrigOp->p3]); 6908 } 6909 } 6910 #endif /* SQLITE_DEBUG */ 6911 #endif /* NDEBUG */ 6912 } /* The end of the for(;;) loop the loops through opcodes */ 6913 6914 /* If we reach this point, it means that execution is finished with 6915 ** an error of some kind. 6916 */ 6917 abort_due_to_error: 6918 if( db->mallocFailed ) rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; 6919 assert( rc ); 6920 if( p->zErrMsg==0 && rc!=SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM ){ 6921 sqlite3VdbeError(p, "%s", sqlite3ErrStr(rc)); 6922 } 6923 p->rc = rc; 6924 sqlite3SystemError(db, rc); 6925 testcase( sqlite3GlobalConfig.xLog!=0 ); 6926 sqlite3_log(rc, "statement aborts at %d: [%s] %s", 6927 (int)(pOp - aOp), p->zSql, p->zErrMsg); 6928 sqlite3VdbeHalt(p); 6929 if( rc==SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM ) sqlite3OomFault(db); 6930 rc = SQLITE_ERROR; 6931 if( resetSchemaOnFault>0 ){ 6932 sqlite3ResetOneSchema(db, resetSchemaOnFault-1); 6933 } 6934 6935 /* This is the only way out of this procedure. We have to 6936 ** release the mutexes on btrees that were acquired at the 6937 ** top. */ 6938 vdbe_return: 6939 db->lastRowid = lastRowid; 6940 testcase( nVmStep>0 ); 6941 p->aCounter[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_VM_STEP] += (int)nVmStep; 6942 sqlite3VdbeLeave(p); 6943 assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || nExtraDelete==0 6944 || sqlite3_strlike("DELETE%",p->zSql,0)!=0 6945 ); 6946 return rc; 6947 6948 /* Jump to here if a string or blob larger than SQLITE_MAX_LENGTH 6949 ** is encountered. 6950 */ 6951 too_big: 6952 sqlite3VdbeError(p, "string or blob too big"); 6953 rc = SQLITE_TOOBIG; 6954 goto abort_due_to_error; 6955 6956 /* Jump to here if a malloc() fails. 6957 */ 6958 no_mem: 6959 sqlite3OomFault(db); 6960 sqlite3VdbeError(p, "out of memory"); 6961 rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; 6962 goto abort_due_to_error; 6963 6964 /* Jump to here if the sqlite3_interrupt() API sets the interrupt 6965 ** flag. 6966 */ 6967 abort_due_to_interrupt: 6968 assert( db->u1.isInterrupted ); 6969 rc = db->mallocFailed ? SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT : SQLITE_INTERRUPT; 6970 p->rc = rc; 6971 sqlite3VdbeError(p, "%s", sqlite3ErrStr(rc)); 6972 goto abort_due_to_error; 6973 } 6974